WO2001011335A2 - Antiviral compounds that inhibit viral replication - Google Patents

Antiviral compounds that inhibit viral replication Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2001011335A2
WO2001011335A2 PCT/US2000/022257 US0022257W WO0111335A2 WO 2001011335 A2 WO2001011335 A2 WO 2001011335A2 US 0022257 W US0022257 W US 0022257W WO 0111335 A2 WO0111335 A2 WO 0111335A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
protein
nsl
proteins
viral
npi
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2000/022257
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2001011335A3 (en
WO2001011335A9 (en
Inventor
Robert O'neill
Ronald Harty
Peter M. Palese
Original Assignee
Mount Sinai School Of Medicine Of New York University
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Mount Sinai School Of Medicine Of New York University filed Critical Mount Sinai School Of Medicine Of New York University
Priority to AU67713/00A priority Critical patent/AU6771300A/en
Publication of WO2001011335A2 publication Critical patent/WO2001011335A2/en
Publication of WO2001011335A9 publication Critical patent/WO2001011335A9/en
Publication of WO2001011335A3 publication Critical patent/WO2001011335A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/005—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from viruses
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/10—Processes for the isolation, preparation or purification of DNA or RNA
    • C12N15/1034—Isolating an individual clone by screening libraries
    • C12N15/1055—Protein x Protein interaction, e.g. two hybrid selection
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/569—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for microorganisms, e.g. protozoa, bacteria, viruses
    • G01N33/56983—Viruses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2760/00—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA ssRNA viruses negative-sense
    • C12N2760/00011—Details
    • C12N2760/16011—Orthomyxoviridae
    • C12N2760/16111—Influenzavirus A, i.e. influenza A virus
    • C12N2760/16122—New viral proteins or individual genes, new structural or functional aspects of known viral proteins or genes
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2760/00—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA ssRNA viruses negative-sense
    • C12N2760/00011—Details
    • C12N2760/20011—Rhabdoviridae
    • C12N2760/20111—Lyssavirus, e.g. rabies virus
    • C12N2760/20122—New viral proteins or individual genes, new structural or functional aspects of known viral proteins or genes
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2760/00—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA ssRNA viruses negative-sense
    • C12N2760/00011—Details
    • C12N2760/20011—Rhabdoviridae
    • C12N2760/20211—Vesiculovirus, e.g. vesicular stomatitis Indiana virus
    • C12N2760/20222—New viral proteins or individual genes, new structural or functional aspects of known viral proteins or genes
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/005—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature from viruses
    • G01N2333/08—RNA viruses
    • G01N2333/11—Orthomyxoviridae, e.g. influenza virus

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the identification of new cellular targets for viral intervention, the identification of antiviral compounds that act on the new targets, and the therapeutic use of such antiviral compounds.
  • Influenza A virus is a negative strand RNA virus belonging to the orthomyxovirus family.
  • the genome of the virus consists of 8 segments and encodes 10 polypeptides.
  • Experimental evidence generated in the laboratory of Scholtissek indicates that the nucleoprotein (NP) is a major determinant of species specificity of influenza viruses (Scholtissek, et al., 1985, Virology 147: 287-294).
  • NP virus-dependent RNA polymerase
  • PBl viral RNA-dependent RNA polymerase
  • PA viral RNA-dependent RNA polymerase
  • the NP is the major structural component of the virion that interacts with genomic RNA, and is required for antitermination during RNA synthesis (Beaton & Krug, 1986, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 83:6282-6286).
  • NP is also required for elongation of RNA chains (Shapiro & Krug, 1988, J. Virol. 62: 2285-2290) but not for initiation (Honda, et al., 1988, J. Biochem. 104:
  • NP genes Phylogenetic analysis divides NP genes into two families: one containing NPs predominantly of avian origin, and one containing those of human origin (Bean, 1984, Virology 133: 438-442; Buckler- White & Murphy, 1986, Virology 155: 345-355; Gammelin, et al., 1989, Virology 170: 71-80; Scholtissek, et al., 1985, Virology 147: 287-
  • the human virus A/ ⁇ K/1/68 and viruses having genetically related NPs cannot rescue mutants of the avian virus A/FPV/Rostock/1/34 (FPV) with temperature sensitive (ts) defects in the NP following double infection of chicken embryo fibroblasts (CEF) at 40°C (Scholtissek, et al., 1985, Virology 147: 287-294; Scholtissek, et al., 1978, Virology 91 : 79-85).
  • CEF chicken embryo fibroblasts
  • MDCK Madin-Darby canine kidney
  • the NS1 protein of influenza A viruses is known to modulate and affect cellular functions.
  • the NS1 is the only non-structural protein of the virus and is abundantly expressed in infected cells (Lazarowitz, et al., 1971, Virology 46: 830-843).
  • the NS1 0 protein may influence multiple steps of gene expression including pre-mRNA splicing (Fortes, et al., 1994, EMBO J. 13: 704-712; Lu, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8: 1817-1828), nucleo-cytoplasmic transport of poly(A)-RNA (Fortes, et al., 1994, EMBO J. 13: 704-712; Qiu, Y., et al., 1994, J. Virology 68: 2425-2432) and translation (De La Luna, S., et al., 1995, J. Virol.
  • NS1 can block the activation of the double-stranded RNA (dsRNA) activated protein kinase (PKR), presumably due to its dsRNA binding activity (Lu, et al., 1995, Virology 214: 222-228).
  • dsRNA double-stranded RNA
  • PSR protein kinase
  • the activation of PKR results in a downregulation of translation and is part of the cellular antiviral defense mechanism.
  • the NSl protein may counteract this cellular response in order to synthesize high levels of viral proteins in the infected cell (Lu,
  • Viruses belonging to the Rhabdoviridae family cause disease in a wide variety of species including vertebrates, invertebrates, and plants (Wagner & Rose, 1996, In Fields, et al., (eds.), Fields Virology, 3rd edition, Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, pp. 1121 -1135).
  • VSV vesicular stomatitis virus
  • rhabdoviruses possess a negative-strand RNA genome. Rhabdoviruses replicate exclusively in the cytoplasm of infected cells, and derive their lipid envelope via budding through the cytoplasmic membrane (for review see Wagner & Rose, 1996, In Fields, et al., (eds.), Fundamental Virology, 3rd edition, Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, pp. 1121-1135 ).
  • M PROTEIN Many aspects of the replication process of rhabdoviruses remain unclear.
  • M protein is released from the cells in the form of lipid vesicles by budding through the cytoplasmic membrane (Justice, et al., 1995, J. Virol., 69, 3156-3160; Li, et al., 1993, J. Virol., 67, 4415-4420).
  • the N-terminal portion of the VSV M protein has been shown to be important for membrane localization, and thus the budding process (Chong & Rose, 1993, J. Virol., 67, 407-414; Chong and Rose, 1994, J. Virol., 68, 441-447; Lenard and Vanderoef, 1990, J.
  • the gag protein of Rous sarcoma virus (RSV) and the M protein of VSV share the ability to associate with the cytoplasmic membrane, and to bud from cells independent of other viral proteins (Justice, et al., 1995, J. Virol., 69, 3156-3160; Li, et al., 1993, J. Virol., 67, 4415-4420; Wills, et al., 1994, J. Virol., 68, 6605-6618).
  • a late (L) budding domain has been identified in the p2b protein of RSV gag and shown to play an essential role in the late stage of budding (Wills, et al., 1994, J. Virol., 68, 6605-6618).
  • a sequence in the RSV L domain matches the sequence of the consensus motif required for interacting with WW domains of cellular proteins (Chen and Sudol, 1996, Techniques in Protein Chemistry VII, 7, 3-12; Chen, et al., 1997, J. Biol. Chem., 272, 17070-17077; Macias, et al, 1996, Nature, 382, 646-649; Sudol, et al., 1995, J. Biol. Chem., 270, 14733-14741). While L domains have been identified in the gag proteins of other retro viruses, only the gag proteins of the oncoviruses appear to have the PPXY motif conserved (Gottlinger, et al., 1991, Proc.
  • the recently described WW domain is (i) a highly structured, modular domain that mediates protein-protein interactions, (ii) present in a wide range of cellular proteins with unrelated functions, and (iii) functionally similar to, but structurally distinct from, Src homology-3 (SH3) domains (for review see Sudol, 1996, In Blundell, et al., (eds.) Prog. Biophys. Mole Biol, Vol. 65, Elsevier Science Ltd., Great Britain, pp. 113-132).
  • SH3 Src homology-3
  • the WW domain has also been implicated in the biology of retroviral budding and assembly (Gamier, et al., 1996, Nature, 381, 744-745; Sudol, 1996, In Blundell, et al., (eds.) Prog. Biophys. Molec. Biol, Vol. 65, Elsevier Science Ltd., Great Britain, pp. 113-132).
  • the L domain of RSV gag mentioned above has been shown recently to interact with the WW domain of the cellular Yes-kinase associated protein (YAP) (Gamier, et al., 1996, Nature, 381, 744-745; Sudol, 1994, Oncogene, 9, 2145-2152).
  • RNA viruses such as influenza and rhabdoviruses.
  • the present invention relates to the identification of host cell proteins that interact with viral proteins required for virus replication, and high throughput assays to identify compounds that interfere with the specific interaction between the viral and host cell protein. Interfering compounds that inhibit viral replication can be used therapeutically to treat viral infection.
  • the invention is based, in part, on the Applicants' discovery of novel interactions between viral proteins such as NP and NS 1 influenza proteins, the rhabdovirus M protein, and human host cell proteins or protein domains referred to herein as NPI-1, NPI-2, NPI-3, NPI-4, NPI-5, NPI-6, NSlI-1, NSl-BP, and cellular proteins containing WW domains, respectively.
  • Host cell proteins such as NPI-1 and NSl I-l may be accessory proteins required for replication of the viruses.
  • Compounds that interfere with the binding of viral proteins with host cell proteins or protein domains, and that inhibit viral replication, can be useful for treating viral infection in vivo.
  • FIGS. 1 A and IB The interactive trap system, as used in the identification of NP- and NSl -interacting proteins.
  • FIG. 1A R 100 contains the reporter gene Lex Aop-LEU2 and a transcriptionally inactive LexA-NP fusion protein (left). Library proteins are synthesized in R 100 transformants in media containing galactose. If the library protein does not interact with the LexA-NP fusion protein, then the LEU2 gene is not transcribed (middle). If the library protein does interact with the LexA-NP fusion protein, then the LEU2 gene is transcriptionally active, and the cell forms a colony on leu " medium (right).
  • FIG. IB The pLexA-NP bait plasmid used in the interactive trap. The coding region of influenza A/PR/8/34 virus nucleoprotein (NP) was subcloned into the EcoRI and Sal I
  • This construction encodes a fusion protein which includes 202 amino acids of LexA and the entire coding region of NP (498 amino acids) separated by 3 amino acids encoded by polylinker sequences derived from the cloning process.
  • the nucleotide sequence and amino acid sequence depicted correspond to SEQ ID NO:l and SEQ ID NO:2, respectively.
  • FIGS. 2A-2D Nucleotide sequence of NPI-1 cDNA (SEQ ID NO:3)and the encoded polypeptide sequence (SEQ ID NO:4).
  • FIG. 3 Comparison of the amino acid sequence of NPI-1 (SEQ ID NO:4) and the amino acid sequence of SRP1 (SEQ ID NO:5). Vertical lines indicate identity; colons and periods indicate conservative changes (Deveraux, et al., 1984, Nucl. Acids Res. 12: 387-
  • FIG. 4 GST-NPI-1 binds to NP in vitro.
  • GST (lanes 1, 5, 6) and GST-NPI-1 (lanes 2, 3, 7, 8) were expressed in bacteria and precipitated from cell lysates on glutathione agarose beads. The complexed beads were then incubated with partially purified influenza vims NP and polymerase preparations (Pol/NP) as indicated. Precipitated proteins were 5 fractionated on a 12.5% SDS polyacrylamide gel, and either stained with Coomassie blue (lanes 1 to 3), or immunoblotted using the monoclonal antibody HT103 directed against the viral nucleoprotein (lanes 4 to 8). Unprecipitated Pol/NP was separated in lane 4. M, protein molecular weight markers; *, GST-NPI-1 fusion protein; arrows indicate major fusion protein degradation products.
  • FIG. 5 Immunoblot of total cellular proteins using polyclonal rabbit sera against
  • NPI-1 Total cell lysates and cytoplasmic cell extracts from HeLa and MDBK cell lines were separated by SDS-PAGE, transferred to nitrocellulose, immunoblotted with anti-NPI-1 sera, and developed by 125 I-protein A. Each lane contains protein from 1 x 10 5 cells.
  • FIGS. 7-11 Partial DNA sequences of isolated coding regions of five different proteins that interact with the NP of influenza A, as detected using the interactive trap system in yeast.
  • the proteins whose sequences are provided are as follows: FIG. 7: Partial nucleotide sequence of NPI-2 (SEQ ID NO:6).
  • FIGS. 8A-8C Partial nucleotide sequence of NPI-3 (SEQ ID NO:7) and the amino acid sequence encoded by the partial nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO:8).
  • FIG. 9 Partial nucleotide sequence of NPI-4 (SEQ ID NO:9).
  • FIG. 10 Partial nucleotide sequence of NPI-5 (SEQ ID NO: 10).
  • FIG. 11 Partial nucleotide sequence of NPI-6 (SEQ ID NO:l 1).
  • FIGS. 12A-12B Nucleotide sequence of the NSlI-1 gene (SEQ ID NO:12) and the encoded amino acid sequence of the NSlI-1 protein (SEQ ID NO:13). The sequence of 2572 bp was determined by dideoxy sequencing of two overlapping clones. The first clone, pK5, was isolated from the yeast library and contains the HeLa cell cDNA comprising nucleotide positions 791 to 2572.
  • the second clone, pRACENSlI-1 resulted from the 5'RACE procedure used to obtain cDNA derived from the 5'-end of NSl I-l mRNA, and comprises nucleotide positions 1 to 944.
  • FIG. 13 Northern blot analysis of HeLa cell poly( A)-RNA using an NS 11- 1 -specific probe.
  • FIG. 14 Co-precipitation of NSl protein from extracts of A/WSN/33-infected MDCK cells by GST-NS1I-1 and glutathione sepharose.
  • Monolayers of MDCK cells were either infected with influenza A/WSN/33 vims at an m.o.i. of 10 or mock-infected, and labeled with 35 S-methionine and cysteine from 5 to 6 hours p.i. Proteins were extracted and used for binding to glutathione sepharose coated with GST-NS1I-1 (lanes 3 and 8) or GST- protein (lane 6).
  • extracts were immunoprecipitated with cc-NSl (lane 2), ⁇ -Ml (lane 4), or non-immune serum (lane 5). Proteins were analyzed by SDS gel electrophoresis and fluorography. Aliquots of the total extracts corresponding to 10 used for the glutathione agarose precipitations are shown (lanes 1 and 7). The positions of vims proteins and molecular weight markers are indicated to the left.
  • FIG. 15 GST-NS1I-1 co-precipitates NSl proteins of influenza A and B virus strains. Extracts of 35 S-labeled MDCK cells infected with the influenza viruses A/duck/Alberta 76 (Panel A), A/turkey/Oregon (Panel B), A/Beijing/32/92 (Panel C), A/Berkeley/1/68 (Panel D), and B/Lee/40 (Panel E) were prepared and used in precipitations of viral proteins by glutathione-sepharose coated with GST-NS1I-1 (lanes "GST-K5") or GST-protein (lanes "GST”) as described in Fig. 14.
  • viral proteins were immunoprecipitated using ⁇ -NSl-, ⁇ -Ml- or non-immune semm (lanes " ⁇ - NS1", “ ⁇ -Ml”, “NI”, respectively). Analysis was by SDS gel electrophoresis and fluorography. Aliquots of the total extracts corresponding to 10 (Panels C and E) or 6.7 (Panels A, B, and D), respectively, are also shown (lanes "T”). The positions of viral proteins are indicated to the right.
  • FIGS. 16A-16B Nucleotide sequence of NSl-BP cDNA (SEQ ID NO:14) and derived amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 15). The sequence of 2752 nucleotides was determined by sequencing of two overlapping clones. Nucleotides at positions +1038 to + 2215 are derived from the HeLa cDNA-insert of the library plasmid p59-l. The 5'-end of the library cDNA is indicated by an arrow. Nucleotides -537 to +1037 were determined by sequencing cloned HeLa cDNA that was generated by 5'RACE. The open reading frame of 619 amino acids spans positions +1 to +1857. The deduced amino acid sequence is given in single letter codes. The stop codon is marked by an asterisk.
  • FIG. 17 Northern blot analysis of poly(A)-selected HeLa cell RNA with an NSl - BP-specific probe.
  • 1 ⁇ g of HeLa cell poly(A)-RNA was separated by formaldehyde-agarose gel electrophoresis and immobilized on a nylon membrane.
  • a 32 P-labeled probe derived from p59-l was used to detect NSl-BP mRNA by hybridization. RNA size markers are indicated to the left.
  • FIG. 18 Alignment of the five tandem repeat elements of NSl-BP (SEQ ID NOS:16-20).
  • the PILEUP program of the Genetics Computer Group (GCG) was used to align repetitive sequences between amino acids 368 and 607 of NSl-BP.
  • the PRETTY program of GCG was used to determine a consensus sequence (SEQ ID NO:21). conserveed amino acids are shown in capital letters. Invariant positions are indicated by bold letters.
  • FIG. 19 Precipitation of 35 S-labeled NSl protein by GST-NS1-BP fusion protein. Radiolabeled NSl protein was synthesized in coupled transcription/translation reactions in the presence of 35 S-methionine using pcDNA3-NSl as a template.
  • the NSl protein was precipitated by glutathione Sepharose coated with GST (lane GST) or GST-NS1-BP, which carries amino acids 347 to 619 of NSl-BP (lane GST-NS1-BP).
  • the precipitates were analyzed by SDS polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis and autoradiography. A 10 aliquot of the total reaction was separated in parallel (T). The positions of molecular weight markers are indicated to the left.
  • FIG. 20 Immunoblot analysis of NSl-BP. Confluent monolayers of Hep-2, 293 and HeLa cells were lysed in RIPA buffer. Soluble proteins from equivalent volumes of extract corresponding to 5 x 10 4 cells were separated by SDS gel electrophoresis, transferred to nitrocellulose membrane and probed with affinity-purified NSl-BP-specific antibodies. The positions of marker proteins are indicated to the left.
  • FIG. 21 Intracellular localization of NSl-BP as determined by indirect immunofluorescence analysis of HeLa cells. Subconfluent HeLa cells were fixed and stained with affinity-purified NS 1 -BP-specific rabbit antibodies followed by visualization using HTC-conjugated secondary antibodies.
  • FIG. 22 Intracellular distribution of the cellular NSl-BP, the SC35 protein and the viral NSl protein in non-infected or influenza A vims infected HeLa cells. Confocal micrographs show non-infected (A-C) or influenza A/WSN/33 vims-infected HeLa cells at 10 hrs. p.i. (D-F; G-I). The intranuclear localization of NSl-BP was visualized by staining with NSl-BP-specific primary rabbit antibodies and FITC-conjugated secondary antibodies (A, D, G).
  • the cellular SC35 protein (B, H) and the viral NSl protein (E) were labeled by monoclonal mouse antibodies and visualized by Texas Red-conjugated anti-mouse IgG.
  • Micrographs in the third column (C, F and I) show confocal overlays of the FITC- and Texas Red-signals from the fields to the left.
  • FIGS. 23A and 23B Pre-mRNA splicing but not spliceosome assembly is inhibited by tmncated NSl-BP.
  • 32 P-labeled MINX pre-mRNA was incubated in HeLa cell nuclear extract under splicing-compatible conditions in the absence (lanes NE) or presence of 80 ng/ ⁇ l affinity-purified GST (lanes GST) or equimolar amounts of affinity purified GST-NSl (lanes GST-NSl) or GST-NSl -BP fusion protein which carries amino acids 347 to 619 of NSl-BP (lanes GST-NSl -BP).
  • A RNA analysis.
  • FIGS. 24 A, 24B and 24C Far- western analysis of VSV-infected cell extracts and VSV virions.
  • FIG. 25 Diagram of fusion proteins consisting of gst fused to the N-terminal 74 amino acids of VSV (Ind.) M protein.
  • gstVSVM74WT contains a wild type PY motif.
  • gstVSVM74P-A contains a single point mutation resulting in a proline (P) to alanine (A) change.
  • gstVSVM74Y-A contains a single point mutation resulting in a tyrosine (Y) to alanine (A) change.
  • 26 A and 26B Far- western analysis of gstVSVM74WT.
  • A) Coomassie brilliant blue stain of bacterial cell extracts expressing gstVSVM74WT (indicated by the arrow) when grown under inducing (IN) conditions, and not expressing gstVSVM74WT when grown under noninducing (U) conditions.
  • M 14 C-labeled protein standards.
  • FIGS. 27A and 27B Far-western analysis of wild type and mutant gst-VSVM fusion proteins.
  • A) Coomassie brilliant blue stain of bacterial cell extracts expressing gst alone (lane 2, short arrow), gstVSVM74WT (lane 3), gstVSVM74Y-A (lane 4), and gstVSVM74P-A (lane 5).
  • Lane 1 represents 14 C-labeled protein standards (MW).
  • the wild type fusion protein migrates slightly slower than the mutant proteins due to the presence of eight additional amino acids encoded by the polylinker region of this constmct.
  • FIG. 28 Diagram of fusion proteins consisting of gst fused to amino acids 1-202 (full-length), 1-69, 1-52 (wild type), or 1-52 (Y-A; tyrosine to alanine mutation) of the rabies vims M protein. The designation of each of the fusion proteins is listed on the left.
  • PPEY is the wild type sequence (E-glutamic acid).
  • FIGS. 29A, 29B and 29C Far-western analysis of gst-rabies M fusion proteins.
  • FIGS. 30A, 30B and 30C Far-western analysis of gst-rabies M fusion proteins and a panel of gst-WW domain fusion proteins.
  • Identical amounts of gst, gstYAPWWl (YAPl), gstYAPWW2 (YAP2), gstDystrophinWW (DYST.), gstNEDD4WW2 (NEDD2), gstNEDD4WW3 (NEDD3), and gstFE65WW (FE65) were immobilized onto nitrocellulose and probed with either gstRabM52WT (Panel A), or gstRabM52Y-A (Panel B).
  • MW R elabeled protein standards.
  • FIG. 3 IB Radiolabeled proteins released into the media covering cells transfected with no DNA (mock, lane 1), T7VSVMWT DNA (lane 2), and T7VSVMY-A DNA (lane 3) were immunoprecipitated with polyclonal antiserum against the M protein of VSV and fractionated by SDS-PAGE. The relative migration of the M protein of VSV is indicated.
  • FIGS. 32A and 32B Indirect immunofluorescence and confocal microscopy of transfected CV-1 cells. A) CV-1 cells expressing wild type VSV M protein at 8 hours post- transfection.
  • the present invention relates to the identification of host cellular proteins that interact with viral proteins important to viral replication and infection; the identification of compounds that interfere with the specific interaction of the host cell and viral proteins; and the evaluation and use of such compounds as antivirals in the treatment of viral infections in animals, including humans.
  • the invention is described in this section and in the examples, below, for the identification and inhibition of interactions between human host cell proteins and viral proteins, including influenza vims and rhabdovims proteins.
  • the first such host cell protein is nucleoprotein interactor 1 (NPI-1), a human cell protein that interacts with the influenza vims NP protein.
  • NPI-1 nucleoprotein interactor 1
  • the NPI-1 gene and protein, and the protein's interaction with NP protein are described in detail in the example in Section 6, below.
  • Other host cell proteins that interact with the NP protein include, but are not limited to, NPI-2, NPI-3, NPI-4, NPI-5, and NPI-6, and are also described, below.
  • NP neuropeptide-1 through NPI-6 host cell proteins
  • NPI-6 host cell proteins provide novel targets for antiviral treatment and serve as excellent models for detailing the aspects of the invention.
  • the principles may be analogously applied to the identification of other host cell proteins that interact with any of the four influenza vims proteins (PA, PBl, PB2, in addition to NP) required for viral RNA replication.
  • Section 7 describes the identification of nonstmctural protein 1 interactor 1 (NSl I-l), a human cell protein that interacts with NS 1.
  • Section 8 describes the identification of nonstmctural protein 1 binding protein (NSl-BP), a human cell protein that also interacts with NSl.
  • the present invention also contemplates identifying interactions between rhabdovims proteins and host cell proteins.
  • Section 9 describes the identification of cellular WW-domains as sites of interaction with the rhabdovims matrix (M) protein.
  • the host cell protein is not a cell surface receptor protein.
  • the present invention further contemplates identifying interactions between host cell proteins and other viral proteins required for infection, including but not limited to, in the case of influenza vims, NEP, HA, NA, M,, and M 2 proteins, or, in the case of rhabdovimses, M protein, for example.
  • RNA vimses both positive and negative stranded RNA vimses, both single and double stranded, including but not limited to single-stranded, positive-sense RNA vimses such as picomavimses, calicivimses, astrovimses, togavimses, flavivimses, coronavimses, arterivimses, and retrovimses; single- stranded, negative-sense RNA vimses such as paramyxoviruses (including parainfluenza vimses, measles virus, mumps vims, and respiratory syncytial vims), rhabdoviruses, filoviruses, orthomyxoviruses, orthomyxo-like vimses including Dhori insect vims, bunyavimses, and arenavimses; and double-stranded, positive-sense RNA vimses such as reovimses and bimavimses, as well as human immuno
  • Any method suitable for detecting protein-protein interactions may be employed for identifying novel viral-host protein interactions, and are considered within the scope of the present invention.
  • some traditional methods are co-immunoprecipitation, crosslinking and copurification through gradients or chromatographic columns.
  • Newer methods result in the simultaneous identification of the genes coding for the protein interacting with a target protein. These methods include probing expression libraries with labeled target protein in a manner similar to antibody probing of ⁇ gtl 1 libraries.
  • yeast interactive trap system One such method that detects protein interactions in vivo, the yeast interactive trap system, was successfully used as described herein to identify the host cell proteins NPI-1 through NPI-6, NSl I-l, and NSl-BP described herein, and is described in detail for illustration only and not by way of limitation.
  • the host cell/viral protein interactions identified are considered targets for antiviral intervention.
  • Assays such as the ones described herein, can be used to identify compounds that interfere with such interactions.
  • the compounds so identified that inhibit vims infection, replication, assembly, or release can be used as antivirals.
  • a given compound found to inhibit one vims may be tested for antiviral activity against a wide range of different vimses that have analogous dependencies on host cell proteins, including but not limited to single-stranded, positive-sense RNA vimses such as picomavimses, calicivimses, astrovimses, togavimses, flavivimses, coronavimses, arterivimses, and retrovimses; single-stranded negative-sense RNA vimses such as paramyxoviruses (including parainfluenza vimses, measles vims, mumps vims, and respiratory syncytial vims), rhabdovimses, filovimses, orthomyxoviruses, orthomyxo-like vimses including Dhori insect vims, bunyavimses, and arenavimses; and double-stranded, positive-sense RNA vimses such as reovimses and bimavimses
  • NPI-1 is important to the import of viral nucleic acid-protein complex into the nucleus of the host cell. Therefore, methods described below that dismpt this process, through interfering with the activity of NPI-1, for example, may be effective in treating vimses with nuclear phases.
  • additional vimses include, but are not limited to, human immunodeficiency vims (HIV), members of the herpes vims family, and adenovimses.
  • host cell proteins that interact with the influenza viral proteins NP (host cell proteins NPI-1 through NPI-6) and NSl (host cell proteins NSl I-l and NSl-BP), and rhabdoviral M-protein (host cell proteins containing WW domains), with particular emphasis on host cell protein NPI-1 ; however, the invention is not limited to NPI-1 and encompasses any viral/host cell protein interactions as targets for therapeutic intervention.
  • NP host cell proteins NPI-1 through NPI-6
  • NSl host cell proteins NSl I-l and NSl-BP
  • rhabdoviral M-protein host cell proteins containing WW domains
  • the gene for the host cell protein NPI-1 was cloned based on its ability to interact with the influenza A vims NP.
  • the NPI-1 is the human homolog of the yeast protein SRP1. Interaction of NPI-1 and NP was demonstrated in yeast by the interactive trap system; in vitro coprecipitation of the NP with a bacterially expressed NPI-1 protein; and in infected cell extracts by coprecipitation of the NP with NPI-1, using anti -NPI-1 sera. The demonstration of this previously unknown interaction is illustrated in the working examples (see Section 6, infra). The data generated indicate that NPI-1 plays a role in the replication of influenza A vimses.
  • NPI-1 is the first cellular protein characterized that interacts with a protein encoded by influenza vimses.
  • the NPI-1 could affect any of a number of NP functions which may include: (1) movement of the ribonucleoprotein complex (RNP) to the nucleus; (2) vRNA synthesis, including antitermination and elongation; (3) mRNA synthesis, including elongation, polyadenylation, and transport to the cytoplasm; and (4) exit of the RNP from the nucleus during virion assembly.
  • RNP ribonucleoprotein complex
  • NPI-1 and SRP1 interact with proteins involved in RNA synthesis implies that there may be fundamental similarities between cellular DNA-dependent transcription and influenza viral RNA-dependent RNA synthesis.
  • Cellular factors like NPI-1, may be shared by the viral and the cellular RNA synthesis machinery to perform similar functions.
  • the NPI-1 may tether the viral RNP to areas of the nuclear matrix where splicing and polyadenylation of mRNA occur. It should be noted that although NPI-1 was isolated from HeLa cells, this cell line is not productively infected by influenza A vims. However, HeLa cells synthesize influenza viral RNAs and proteins (see Fig.
  • RNA synthesis was previously been used to examine viral RNA synthesis (Beaton & Krug, 1986, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 83:6282-6286).
  • the viral NP exists in two forms in the infected cell. One form is associated with ribonucleoprotein complexes (RNP), and the other is a free form (Shapiro & Krug, 1988, J. Virol. 62: 2285-2290).
  • Pol/NP preparations used in coprecipitation experiments with NPI-1 were purified over cesium chloride/glycerol gradients (Honda, et al., 1988, J. Biochem. 104: 1021-1026), which dissociate and purify virion proteins away from vRNA.
  • NPI-1 and SRP1 are 50% identical and 81% conserved at the amino acid level. This is a very high degree of conservation between proteins belonging to organisms as distantly related as humans and yeast, and suggests that the NPI-1/SRPl performs a very basic function in the cell. NPI-1 and SRP1 have eight internal repeats, each of approximately 42- amino acids (Fig. 3). This repeat, termed the ARM motif, was originally identified in the Drosophila segment polarity gene armadillo (Riggleman, et al., 1989, Genes Dev.
  • NPI-1 In contrast to the armadillo protein, SRP1 and NPI-1 appear to be localized to the nucleus. If NPI-1, like SRP1 (Yano, et al., 1992, Mol. Cell. Biol. 12: 5640-5651), is associated with the nuclear membrane, it is possible that NPI-1 functions to tether viral RNP to the nuclear membranes (Jackson, et al., 1982, Nature 296: 366-368). It should be noted that NPI-1 may be related to (or identical with) a nuclear protein that has been found to be involved in V(D)J recombination (Cuomo, et al., 1994, Meeting abstract F015, Keystone Symposium on Recombination).
  • the carboxyl terminal 265 amino acids of the NPI-1 which were sufficient for interaction with the viral NP, contain four and one-half ARM repeats. Individual repeats, in general, are approximately 30 identical with the ARM consensus sequence. This is consistent with the degree of conservation in ARM repeats of other proteins (Peifer, et al., 1994, Cell 76: 789-791).
  • NPI-2, NPI-3, NPI-4, NPI-5, and NPI-6 were isolated that partially encode proteins that interact with the NP of influenza A vims.
  • NSl I-l protein is the human homolog of porcine 17 ⁇ -estradiol dehydrogenase.
  • proteins with a dehydrogenase function have recently been shown to be involved in post-transcriptional events of gene expression (Hentze, 1994, Trends Biochem. Sci. 19: 101-103). This supports an important functional role for the NSl I-l interaction during the viral life cycle.
  • FIG. 2 Protein sequence, homologous to SRP1 of yeast 10 NPI-2 FIG. 7 Identical to sequences of hnRNP C proteins (Lahiri and Thomas, 1986, Nucl. Acids Res. 14: 4077-4094)
  • FIG. 8 NPI-4 FIG. 9 NPI-5 FIG. 10
  • FIG. 1 1 NSlI-1 FIG. 12 Protein sequence, homologous to porcine 17 ⁇ -estradiol dehydrogenase
  • FIG. 16 WW domains (See Section 8)
  • NPI-3, NPI-4, and NPI-5 these sequences were described by other groups and designated Rchl, PC4, and BAT1 , respectively.
  • the coding sequence for NPI-2 is identical to sequences coding for the previously 25 identified hnRNP C proteins (Lahiri and Thomas, 1986, Nucl. Acids Res. 14: 4077-4094).
  • the NPI-3, NPI-4, NPI-5, and NPI-6 coding sequences were unknown prior to their identification by Applicant.
  • the coding sequences for NSl I-l and NSl-BP are described in detail in the example in Sections 7 and 8, below.
  • the WW domain was previously characterized by Sudol, 1996, In Blundell, et al., (eds.), Prog. Biophys. Molec. Biol, Vol. 30 65, Elsevier Science Ltd., Great Britain, pp. 113-132, as detailed in Section 9, below.
  • the specific binding domains of the viral and host cell protein binding partners can be used in accordance with the invention as targets for therapeutic intervention or screening assays to identify inhibitory compounds.
  • peptides corresponding to the binding site of the viral or host cell protein can be used as antiviral inhibitors by dismpting the 35 binding between the binding partners.
  • peptides having amino acid sequences within the viral NP-NLS domain can be used to dis pt the interaction between NP and NPI-1, and thereby inhibit viral replication, as detailed in the Example in Section 10, below.
  • such an inhibitory peptide comprises a 19 amino-acid sequence of an NP-NLS oligopeptide (Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22); corresponding to amino acids 2-20 of NP).
  • the protein of the invention comprises amino acids 1-20 of NP.
  • the protein of the invention comprises a subsequence from 8-18 amino acids in length of the Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22) 19-mer of the NP-NLS oligopeptide.
  • the protein of the invention comprises an 8 amino-acid sequence Thr Lys Arg Ser Xaa Xaa Xaa Met (SEQ ID NO:23), which corresponds to the conserved domain of an NP-NLS peptide.
  • the invention also contemplates a protein of the invention comprising a subsequence of the Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22) 19-mer of the NP-NLS oligopeptide in which position 19 (amino acid Gin) is deleted.
  • the invention contemplates, in addition to the DNA sequences disclosed herein, 1) any DNA sequence that encodes the same amino acid sequence as encoded by the DNA sequences shown in Figures 2, 7-12 and 16 any DNA sequence that hybridizes to the complement of the coding sequences disclosed herein (see Figs. 2, 7-12, and 16) under highly stringent conditions, e.g., hybridization to filter-bound DNA in 0.5 M NaHPO 4 , 7% sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), 1 mM EDTA at 65 °C, and washing in O.lxSSC/0.1 SDS at 68°C (Ausubel, F.M., et al., eds., 1989, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol.
  • the invention also encompasses 1) DNA vectors that contain any of the coding sequences disclosed herein (see Figs. 2, 7-12, and 16), and/or their complements (i.e., antisense); 2) DNA expression vectors that contain any of the coding sequences disclosed herein (see Figs. 2, 7-12, and 16), and/or their complements (i.e., antisense), operatively associated with a regulatory element that directs the expression of the coding and/or antisense sequences; and 3) genetically engineered host cells that contain any of the coding sequences disclosed herein (see Figs.
  • Regulatory elements include but are not limited to inducible and non-inducible promoters, enhancers, operators and other elements known to those skilled in the art that drive and regulate expression.
  • the invention includes fragments of any of the DNA sequences disclosed herein.
  • influenza B vims ribonucleoprotein complex was isolated and using a Western immunoblot assay, it was found that the cellular NPI-1 was associated with this complex. This result indicates that NPI-1, isolated based on its interaction with influenza A vims NP, also interacts with influenza B vims NP. Thus, compounds that inhibit NP-NPI-1 interactions in influenza A vims and thereby inhibit influenza A viral infection should be similarly effective as antivirals against influenza B vims.
  • Host cell genes that are homologous to those identified herein may be obtained by several methods.
  • different host cell proteins that share the property of interacting with the same viral protein, e.g. influenza A vims NP may also share genetic homology.
  • the genes identified through the interactive trap selection may be homologous to one another.
  • any homologous gene may be obtained using cloning methods well known to those skilled in the art, including but not limited to the use of appropriate probes to detect the homologous genes within an appropriate cDNA or gDNA (genomic DNA) library.
  • cloning methods well known to those skilled in the art, including but not limited to the use of appropriate probes to detect the homologous genes within an appropriate cDNA or gDNA (genomic DNA) library.
  • This method is especially useful for obtaining proteins that may not share the property of binding to the same viral protein, but may nonetheless be genetically homologous.
  • homologous proteins may interact with proteins of vimses other than the vims used in the interactive trap.
  • a host cell gene whose product was detected through its interaction with an influenza A viral protein may be homologous to another gene whose product does not interact with influenza A vims, but which does interact with influenza B viral protein.
  • cDNA libraries may be constructed from cells infected with a vims of interest.
  • RNA vimses such as picomavimses, calicivimses, astrovimses, togavimses, flavivimses, coronavimses, arterivimses, and retrovimses
  • single-stranded, negative-sense RNA vimses such as paramyxoviruses (including parainfluenza vimses, measles vims, mumps vims, and respiratory syncytial vims), rhabdoviruses, filovimses, orthomyxovimses, orthomyxo-like vimses including Dhori insect vims, bunyavimses, and arenavimses
  • double-stranded, positive-sense RNA vimses such as reovimses and bimavimses, as well as human immunodeficiency vims (HIV), members of the herpe
  • binding partners The host cell protein and the viral protein that interact and bind are sometimes referred to herein as "binding partners". This term also includes peptide fragments, produced as described in the subsections below, comprising the binding domain of each respective protein. Any of a number of assay systems may be utilized to test compounds for their ability to interfere with the interaction of the binding partners. However, rapid high throughput assays for screening large numbers of compounds, including but not limited to ligands (natural or synthetic), peptides, or small organic molecules are preferred. Compounds that are so identified to interfere with the interaction of the binding partners should be further evaluated for antiviral activity in cell based assays, animal model systems and in patients as described herein.
  • the basic principle of the assay systems used to identify compounds that interfere with the interaction between the viral and host cell proteins involves preparing a reaction mixture containing the viral protein and the host cell protein under conditions and for a time sufficient to allow the two proteins to interact and bind, thus forming a complex.
  • the reaction is conducted in the presence and absence of the test compound, i.e., the test compound may be initially included in the reaction mixture, or added at a time subsequent to the addition of the viral and host cell protein; controls are incubated without the test compound or with a placebo. The formation of any complexes between the viral protein and the host cell protein is then detected.
  • NP-NLS oligopeptide consisting of amino acids 2-10 of the NLS peptide was used to inhibit viral growth a thousand-fold in cultured MDBK cells.
  • peptides that correspond to the NP-NLS target site of binding with NPI-1 can inhibit the interaction of NP with NPI-1 and can be used to treat influenza infection.
  • NP-NLS was found to bind NPI-1 at a domain of NPI-1 corresponding to amino acids 425-538 of NPI-1.
  • an NP-NLS peptide is used to dismpt the binding interaction of NP with NPI-1 and/or NPI-3.
  • an amino acid sequence ranging from 8-20 amino acids of the N-terminus of NP is used.
  • a 19-mer amino acid sequence (Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22)) corresponding to amino acids 2-20 of the NP protein is used.
  • the peptide used to dismpt the binding interaction of NP with NPI-1 and/or NPI-1 comprises a 19 amino-acid sequence of an NP-NLS oligopeptide (Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22); corresponding to amino acids 2-20 of NP).
  • the peptide used to disrupt the binding interaction comprises amino acids 1-20 of NP.
  • the peptide used to dismpt the binding interaction comprises a subsequence from 8-18 amino acids long of the Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22) 19-mer of the NP-NLS oligopeptide.
  • the peptide used to dismpt the binding interaction comprises an 8 amino-acid sequence Thr Lys Arg Ser Xaa Xaa Xaa Met (SEQ ID NO:23), which corresponds to the conserved domain of an NP-NLS peptide.
  • the invention contemplates a peptide that is used to dismpt the binding interaction comprising the Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22) 19-mer of the NP-NLS oligopeptide, or an 8-18 amino acid subsequence thereof, in which one or more of the following amino acids substitutions are made at the following positions:
  • the invention also contemplates a peptide that is used to dismpt the binding interaction comprising a subsequence of the Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin 19-mer of the NP-NLS oligopeptide in which position 19 (amino acid Gin) is deleted.
  • the host cell protein and viral protein binding partners used as components in the assay may be derived from natural sources, e.g., purified from cells and vims, respectively, using protein separation techniques well known in the art; produced by recombinant DNA technology using techniques known in the art (see e.g., Sambrook, et al., 1989, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratories Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.); and/or chemically synthesized in whole or in part using techniques known in the art; e.g., peptides can be synthesized by solid phase techniques, cleaved from the resin and purified by preparative high performance liquid chromatography (see, e.g., Creighton, 1983, Proteins: Structures and Molecular Principles, W.H.
  • the composition of the synthetic peptides may be confirmed by amino acid analysis or sequencing; e.g. , using the Edman degradation procedure (see e.g. , Creighton, 1983, Proteins: Stmctures and Molecular Principles, W.H. Freeman & Co., N.Y., pp. 34- 49).
  • the peptide fragments should be produced to correspond to the binding domains of the respective proteins. Any number of methods routinely practiced in the art can be used to identify and isolate the protein's binding site. These methods include but are not limited to mutagenesis of one of the genes encoding the protein and screening for dismption of binding in a co-immunoprecipitation assay, or mutagenesis of the host cell gene and selecting for resistance to viral infection. Compensating mutations in the viral gene can be selected that allow for viral growth in this mutant host. Sequence analysis of the genes encoding the respective proteins will reveal the mutations that correspond to the region of the protein involved in interactive binding. Alternatively, one protein can be anchored to a solid surface using methods described in section 5.2.2.
  • a short, labeled peptide comprising the binding domain may remain associated with the solid material, which can be isolated and identified by amino acid sequencing. Also, once the gene for the protein is obtained, short gene segments can be engineered to express peptide fragments of the protein, which can then be tested for binding activity and purified or synthesized.
  • the amino acid sequence of the binding partners which may be used in the assays of the invention need not be identical to the reported sequence of the genes encoding them.
  • the binding partners may comprise altered sequences in which amino acid residues are deleted, added, or substituted resulting in a functionally equivalent product.
  • amino acid residues may be substituted for residues within the sequence resulting in a change of sequence.
  • substitutes may be selected from other members of the class to which the amino acid belongs; e.g., the nonpolar (hydrophobic) amino acids include alanine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan, and methionine; the polar neutral amino acids include glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine, tyrosine, asparagine, and glutamine; the positively charged (basic) amino acids include arginine, lysine, and histidine; the negatively charged (acidic) amino acids include aspartic and glutamic acid.
  • the nonpolar (hydrophobic) amino acids include alanine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan, and methionine
  • the polar neutral amino acids include glycine, serine,
  • One of the binding partners used in the assay system should be labeled, either directly or indirectly, to facilitate detection of a complex formed between the viral and host cell proteins.
  • Any of a variety of suitable labeling systems may be used including but not limited to radioisotopes such as 125 1, 131 1, 35 S or 3 H; enzyme labeling systems that generate a detectable colorimetric signal or light when exposed to substrate such as horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, beta-galactosidase, and luciferase; and fluorescent labels such as umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride and phycoerythrin.
  • fusion proteins that can facilitate labeling, immobilization and/or detection.
  • the coding sequence of the viral or host cell protein can be fused to that of a heterologous protein that has enzyme activity or serves as an enzyme substrate in order to facilitate labeling and detection.
  • the fusion constructs should be designed so that the heterologous component of the fusion product does not interfere with binding of the host cell and viral protein.
  • Indirect labeling involves the use of a third protein, such as a labeled antibody, which specifically binds to one of the binding partners, i.e., either the host cell protein or viral protein used.
  • a third protein such as a labeled antibody
  • antibody or “antibodies” as used herein refers to immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen binding site which specifically binds an antigen, such as to one of the binding partners, and does not bind other antigens in a sample.
  • Antibodies include, but are not limited to, monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, multispecific antibodies, human antibodies, humanized antibodies, chimeric antibodies, single chain Fv (scFv), single chain antibodies, anti-idiotypic (anti-Id) antibodies, F(ab) fragments, F(ab')2 fragments, and epitope-binding fragments of any of the above.
  • the antibodies may be generated by any suitable method known in the art.
  • Polyclonal antibodies to an antigen-of-interest can be produced by various procedures well known in the art.
  • a polypeptide of the invention can be administered to various host animals including, but not limited to, rabbits, mice, rats, etc. to induce the production of sera containing polyclonal antibodies specific for the antigen.
  • adjuvants may be used to increase the immunological response, depending on the host species, and include but are not limited to, Freund's (complete and incomplete), mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanins, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful human adjuvants such as BCG (bacille Calmette-Guerin) and corynebacterium parvum. Such adjuvants are also well known in the art.
  • Monoclonal antibodies can be prepared using a wide variety of techniques known in the art including the use of hybridoma, recombinant, and phage display technologies, or a combination thereof.
  • monoclonal antibodies can be produced using hybridoma techniques including those known in the art and taught, for example, in Harlow et al, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed. 1988); Hammerling, et al, in: Monoclonal Antibodies and T-Cell Hybridomas 563-681 (Elsevier, N.Y., 1981) (said references incorporated by reference in their entireties).
  • the term “monoclonal antibody” as used herein is not limited to antibodies produced through hybridoma technology.
  • the term “monoclonal antibody” refers to an antibody that is derived from a single clone, including any eukaryotic, prokaryotic, or phage clone, and not the method by which it is produced.
  • mice can be immunized with a polypeptide of the invention or a cell expressing such peptide.
  • an immune response e.g., antibodies specific for the antigen are detected in the mouse semm
  • the mouse spleen is harvested and splenocytes isolated.
  • the splenocytes are then fused by well known techniques to any suitable myeloma cells, for example cells from cell line SP20 available from the ATCC.
  • Hybridomas are selected and cloned by limited dilution.
  • hybridoma clones are then assayed by methods known in the art for cells that secrete antibodies capable of binding a polypeptide of the invention.
  • Ascites fluid which generally contains high levels of antibodies, can be generated by immunizing mice with positive hybridoma clones.
  • Antibody fragments which recognize specific epitopes may be generated by known techniques.
  • Fab and F(ab')2 fragments of the invention may be produced by proteolytic cleavage of immunoglobulin molecules, using enzymes such as papain (to produce Fab fragments) or pepsin (to produce F(ab')2 fragments).
  • F(ab')2 fragments contain the variable region, the light chain constant region and the CHI domain of the heavy chain.
  • Antibodies may also be generated using various phage display methods known in the art. In phage display methods, functional antibody domains are displayed on the surface of a phage particles which carry the polynucleotide sequences encoding them.
  • such phage can be utilized to display antigen binding domains expressed from a repertoire or combinatorial antibody library (e.g., human or murine).
  • Phage expressing an antigen binding domain that binds the antigen of interest can be selected or identified with antigen, e.g., using labeled antigen or antigen bound or captured to a solid surface or bead.
  • Phage used in these methods are typically filamentous phage including fd and Ml 3 binding domains expressed from phage with Fab, Fv or disulfide stabilized Fv antibody domains recombinantly fused to either the phage gene III or gene VIII protein.
  • Chimeric antibodies can be produced using any technique known to those of skill in the art. See e.g., Morrison, Science 229:1202 (1985); Oi et al, BioTechniques 4:214 (1986); Gillies eto/., (1989)J /mmw «o/. etbo ⁇ l25:191-202; U.S. PatentNos.5,807,715; 4,816,567; and 4,816,397, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
  • a chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions of the antibody are derived from different animal species, such as antibodies having a variable region derived from a murine monoclonal antibody and a human immunoglobulin constant region.
  • Human antibodies can be produced using any technique known to those of skill in the art.
  • Humanized antibodies are antibody molecules from non-human species antibody that binds the desired antigen having one or more complementarity determining regions (CDRs) from the non-human species and a framework regions from a human immunoglobulin molecule.
  • CDRs complementarity determining regions
  • framework residues in the human framework regions will be substituted with the corresponding residue from the CDR donor antibody to alter, preferably improve, antigen binding.
  • framework substitutions are identified by methods well known in the art, e.g., by modeling of the interactions of the CDR and framework residues to identify framework residues important for antigen binding and sequence comparison to identify unusual framework residues at particular positions. (See, e.g., Queen et al, U.S. Patent No.
  • Antibodies can be humanized using a variety of techniques known in the art including, for example, CDR-grafting (EP 239,400; PCT publication WO 91/09967; U.S. Patent Nos. 5,225,539; 5,530,101 ; and 5,585,089), veneering or resurfacing (EP 592,106; EP 519,596; Padlan, Molecular Immunology 2$(4/5):489-498 (1991); Studnickaet ⁇ /., Protein Engineering 7(6):805-814 (1994); Roguska.
  • Human antibodies can be made by a variety of methods known in the art including phage display methods described above using antibody libraries derived from human immunoglobulin sequences. See also, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,444,887 and 4,716,111 ; and PCT publications WO 98/46645, WO 98/50433, WO 98/24893, WO 98/16654, WO 96/34096, WO 96/33735, and WO 91/10741 ; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • Human antibodies can also be produced using transgenic mice which are incapable of expressing functional endogenous immunoglobulins, but which can express human immunoglobulin genes.
  • the human heavy and light chain immunoglobulin gene complexes may be introduced randomly or by homologous recombination into mouse embryonic stem cells.
  • the human variable region, constant region, and diversity region may be introduced into mouse embryonic stem cells in addition to the human heavy and light chain genes.
  • the mouse heavy and light chain immunoglobulin genes may be rendered non-functional separately or simultaneously with the introduction of human immunoglobulin loci by homologous recombination. In particular, homozygous deletion of the Jp j region prevents endogenous antibody production.
  • the modified embryonic stem cells are expanded and microinjected into blastocysts to produce chimeric mice.
  • the chimeric mice are then be bred to produce homozygous offspring which express human antibodies.
  • the transgenic mice are immunized in the normal fashion with a selected antigen, e.g., all or a portion of a polypeptide of the invention.
  • Monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen can be obtained from the immunized, transgenic mice using conventional hybridoma technology.
  • the human immunoglobulin transgenes harbored by the transgenic mice rearrange during B cell differentiation, and subsequently undergo class switching and somatic mutation.
  • the assay can be conducted in a heterogeneous or homogeneous format.
  • Heterogeneous assays involve anchoring one of the binding partners onto a solid phase and detecting complexes anchored on the solid phase at the end of the reaction.
  • the entire reaction is carried out in a liquid phase.
  • the order of addition of reactants can be varied to obtain different information about the compounds being tested.
  • test compounds that interfere with the interaction between the binding partners e.g., by competition, can be identified by conducting the reaction in the presence of the test substance; i.e., by adding the test substance to the reaction mixture prior to or simultaneously with the viral protein and host cell protein.
  • test compounds that dismpt preformed complexes e.g. compounds with higher binding constants that displace one of the binding partners from the complex
  • one binding partner e.g., either the viral protein or the host cell protein
  • its binding partner which is not anchored, is labeled, either directly or indirectly.
  • microtiter plates are conveniently utilized.
  • the anchored species may be immobilized by non-covalent or covalent attachments. Non-covalent attachment may be accomplished simply by coating the solid surface with a solution of the protein and drying. Alternatively, an immobilized antibody specific for the protein may be used to anchor the protein to the solid surface.
  • the surfaces may be prepared in advance and stored.
  • the binding partner of the immobilized species is added to the coated surface with or without the test compound. After the reaction is complete, unreacted components are removed (e.g., by washing) and any complexes formed will remain immobilized on the solid surface.
  • the detection of complexes anchored on the solid surface can be accomplished in a number of ways. Where the binding partner was pre- labeled, the detection of label immobilized on the surface indicates that complexes were formed. Where the binding partner is not pre-labeled, an indirect label can be used to detect complexes anchored on the surface; e.g.
  • test compounds that inhibit complex formation or that dismpt preformed complexes can be detected.
  • the reaction can be conducted in a liquid phase in the presence or absence of the test compound, the reaction products separated from unreacted components, and complexes detected; e.g., using an immobilized antibody specific for one binding partner to anchor any complexes formed in solution, and a labeled antibody specific for the other binding partner to detect anchored complexes.
  • test compounds that inhibit complex or which dismpt preformed complexes can be identified.
  • a homogeneous assay can be used.
  • a preformed complex of the host cell and viral protein is prepared in which one of the binding partners is labeled, but the signal generated by the label is quenched due to complex formation (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 4,109,496 by Rubenstein which utilizes this approach for immunoassays).
  • the addition of a test substance that competes with and displaces one of the binding partners from the preformed complex will result in the generation of a signal above background. In this way, test substances that dismpt the viral protein-host cell protein interaction can be identified.
  • NPI-1 can be prepared for immobilization using recombinant DNA techniques described in section 5.2.1., supra. Its coding region can be fused to the glutathione-S-transferase (GST) gene using the fusion vector pGEX-5X-l, in such a manner that its binding activity is maintained in the resulting fusion protein.
  • GST glutathione-S-transferase
  • NP can be purified and used to raise a monoclonal antibody, specific for NP, using methods routinely practiced in the art and described above. This antibody can be labeled with the radioactive isotope 125 I, for example, by methods routinely practiced in the art.
  • the GST-NPI-1 fusion protein can be anchored to glutathione-agarose beads.
  • NP can then be added in the presence or absence of the test compound in a manner that allows NP to interact with and bind to the NPI-1 portion of the fusion protein.
  • unbound material can be washed away, and the NP-specific labeled monoclonal antibody can be added to the system and allowed to bind to the complexed binding partners.
  • the interaction between NP and NPI-1 can be detected by measuring the amount of radioactivity that remains associated with the glutathione-agarose beads. A successful inhibition of the interaction by the test compound will result in a decrease in measured radioactivity.
  • the viral binding partner such as NS 1
  • the viral binding partner can be prepared for immobilization using recombinant DNA techniques described in section 5.2.1., supra.
  • the NSl coding region can be fused to the glutathione-S-transferase (GST) gene using a fusion vector such as pGEX-5X-l , in such a manner that its binding activity is maintained in the resulting fusion protein.
  • GST glutathione-S-transferase
  • a corresponding host cell binding partner such as NSl-BP can be purified and used to raise an NSl-BP-specific monoclonal antibody which can be labeled with a radioactive isotope, using methods described below in section 5.2.1.3.
  • the GST-NSl fusion protein can be anchored to glutathione- agarose beads.
  • NSl-BP can then be added in the presence or absence of the test compound in a manner that allows NSl-BP to interact with and bind to the NSl portion of the fusion protein.
  • unbound material can be washed away, and the NSl -specific labeled monoclonal antibody can be added to the system and allowed to bind to the complexed binding partners.
  • the interaction between NSl and NSl-BP can be detected by measuring the amount of radioactivity that remains associated with the glutathione-agarose beads. A successful inhibition of the interaction by the test compound will result in a decrease in measured radioactivity.
  • NSl-BP for example, a GST-NSl -BP fusion protein and NSl (or conversely, a GST-NSl fusion protein and NSl-BP) can be mixed together in liquid in the absence of the solid glutathione-agarose beads.
  • the test compound can be added either during or after the binding partners are allowed to interact. This mixture can then be added to the glutathione-agarose beads and unbound material is washed away. Again the extent of inhibition of the binding partner interaction can be detected by measuring the radioactivity associated with the beads.
  • these same techniques can be employed using peptide fragments that correspond to the binding domains of the viral and host cell proteins, respectively, in place of one or both of the full length proteins.
  • binding domains can be identified, as described in section 5.2.1., supra.
  • NSl-BP can be anchored to a solid material as described above in this section by making a GST-NS 1 -BP fusion protein and allowing it to bind to glutathione agarose beads.
  • NSl can be labeled with a radioactive isotope, such as 35 S, and cleaved with a proteolytic enzyme such as trypsin. Cleavage products can then be added to the anchored GST-NS 1-BP fusion protein and allowed to bind.
  • labeled bound material representing the NS 1 binding domain
  • labeled bound material representing the NS 1 binding domain
  • Peptides so identified can be produced synthetically or fused to appropriate facilitative proteins using recombinant DNA technology, as described in section 5.2.1., supra.
  • a given compound found to inhibit one virus may be tested for general antiviral activity against a wide range of different viruses that have analogous dependencies on host cell proteins.
  • a compound that inhibits the interaction of influenza vims NSl with NSl-BP by binding to the NSl binding site can be tested, according to the assays described in section 5.3. infra, against other vimses, particularly those that have similar proteins, e.g., parainfluenza vimses.
  • ASSAYS FOR ANTIVIRAL ACTIVITY Any of the inhibitory compounds that are identified in the foregoing assay systems may be tested for antiviral activity.
  • an inhibitor identified in the foregoing assay systems to prevent viral growth can be assayed by plaque formation or by other indices of viral growth, such as the TCID 50 or growth in the allantois of the chick embryo.
  • an appropriate cell line or embryonated eggs are infected with wild-type influenza vims, and the test compound is added to the tissue culture medium either at or after the time of infection.
  • the effect of the test compound is scored by quantitation of viral particle formation as indicated by hemagglutinin (HA) titers measured in the supernatants of infected cells or in the allantoic fluids of infected embryonated eggs; by the presence of viral plaques; or, in cases where a plaque phenotype is not present, by an index such as the TCID 50 or growth in the allantois of the chick embryo, or with a hemagglutination assay.
  • HA hemagglutinin
  • An inhibitor can be scored by the ability of a test compound to depress the HA titer or plaque formation, or to reduce the cytopathic effect in vims-infected cells or the allantois of the chick embryo, or by its ability to reduce viral particle formation as measured in a hemagglutination assay.
  • An inhibitor can also be scored by the ability of a test compound to decrease the amount of a viral protein, e.g., rhabdovims M protein, released from cells in a functional budding assay, such as the one described in Justice, et al., 1995 (J. Virol., 69, 3156-3160) and used in the experiments described in the example in section 9.1.5 infra).
  • an inhibitor to prevent replication of vimses such as picomavimses, calicivimses, astrovimses, togavimses, flavivimses, coronavimses, arterivimses, retrovimses, paramyxoviruses (including parainfluenza vimses, measles vims, mumps virus, and respiratory syncytial vims), rhabdoviruses, filovimses, orthomyxovimses, orthomyxo-like vimses including Dhori insect virus, bunyavimses, and arenaviruses; and double-stranded, positive-sense RNA viruses such as reovimses and bimavimses, as well as human immunodeficiency vims (HIV), members of the herpes vims family, and adenovimses, can be assayed in animal models that are natural or adapted hosts or transgenic hosts for the vims.
  • vimses such as picomavimses, calicivim
  • Such animals may include mammals such as pigs, ferrets, mice, monkeys, horses, and primates, or birds. As described in detail in Section 5.5 infra, such animal models can be used to determine the LD 50 and the ED 50 in animal subjects, and such data can be used to derive the therapeutic index for the inhibitor of the viral/host cell protein interaction.
  • Inhibitory compounds identified in the foregoing screening assays which may be used in accordance with the invention may include but are not limited to, polypeptides, peptides, peptidomimetics, antibodies, nucleic acids (e.g., RNA and DNA), and small organic or inorganic molecules and other dmgs.
  • the inhibitory compounds Preferably, have a molecular weight of less than 2000
  • Daltons more preferably less than 1500 Daltons, even more preferably less than 1000 Daltons, and most preferably, less than 700 Daltons.
  • Peptides having an amino acid sequence corresponding to the domain of the host cell protein that binds to the viral protein may be used to compete with the native viral protein and, therefore, may be useful as inhibitors in accordance with the invention.
  • peptides having an amino acid sequence corresponding to the domain of the viral protein that binds to the host cell protein may be used.
  • Such peptides may be synthesized chemically or produced via recombinant DNA technology using methods well known in the art (e.g., Creighton, 1983, Proteins: Stmctures and Molecular Principles, W.H. Freeman & Co., N.Y., pp.
  • Non-classical amino acids include but are not limited to the D-isomers of the common amino acids, ⁇ -amino isobutyric acid, 4-aminobutyric acid, hydroxyproline, sarcosine, citrulline, cysteic acid, t-butylglycine, t-butylalanine, phenylglycine, cyclohexylalanine, ⁇ -alanine, designer amino acids such as ⁇ -methyl amino acids, C ⁇ - methyl amino acids, and N ⁇ -methyl amino acids.
  • peptides can be chemically modified by any chemical modification techniques known to those of skill in the art, including but not limited to specific chemical cleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8 protease, NaBH 4 ; acetylation, formylation, oxidation, reduction; metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin; etc.
  • the peptides may be isolated and purified by standard methods including chromatography (e.g., ion exchange, affinity, and sizing column chromatography), centrifugation, differential solubility, or by any other standard technique for the purification of peptides.
  • Lipofectin or liposomes may be used to 5 deliver the peptides to cells.
  • antibodies that are both specific for the binding domains of either the host cell or viral proteins and interfere with their interaction may be used.
  • Such antibodies may be generated using standard techniques described in Section 5.2.1., supra, against the
  • Such antibodies include but are not limited to polyclonal, monoclonal, Fab fragments, single chain antibodies, chimeric antibodies, etc. Where whole antibodies are used, internalizing antibodies are preferred. However, lipofectin may be used to deliver the antibody or a fragment of the Fab region which binds to the viral or host cell protein epitope
  • the smallest inhibitory fragment that binds to the target protein's binding domain is preferred.
  • the identified compounds that inhibit viral replication can be administered to an animal, preferably a mammal and most preferably a human at therapeutically effective doses to treat, prevent or inhibit viral infection.
  • a therapeutically effective dose is the amount of a compound sufficient to inhibit or reduce viral replication, the amount compound sufficient to induce or enhance an immune response to the virus, or the amount of a compound r. c sufficient to result in amelioration of symptoms of viral infection.
  • the compound administered to treat, prevent or inhibit viral infection is substantially purified (e.g., substantially free from substances that limit its effect or produce undesired side-effects).
  • Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard
  • TM pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals e.g., for determining the LD 50 (the dose lethal to 50 of the population) and the ED 50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50 of the population).
  • the dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD 50 /ED 50 .
  • Compounds that exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. While compounds that exhibit toxic side
  • effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such compounds to the site of infection in order to minimize damage to uninfected cells and reduce side effects.
  • the data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans.
  • the dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity.
  • the dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
  • the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays.
  • a dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e. , the concentration of the test compound that achieves a half-maximal infection, or a half-maximal inhibition) as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans.
  • Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
  • Suitable doses for antibodies range from 0.1 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg of body weight (generally 10 mg/kg to 20 mg/kg), and suitable doses for peptides or polypeptide range from about 0.001 to 30 mg/kg body weight.
  • Various delivery systems are known and can be used to administer a compound, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules, recombinant cells capable of expressing the compound, receptor-mediated endocytosis (see, e.g., Wu and Wu, 1987, J Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432), constmction of a nucleic acid as part of a retroviral or other vector, etc.
  • Methods of introduction include but are not limited to intratumoral, intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, epidural, and oral routes.
  • the compounds may be administered by any convenient route, for example by infusion or bolus injection, by absorption through epithelial or mucocutaneous linings (e.g., oral mucosa, rectal and intestinal mucosa, etc.) and may be administered together with other biologically active agents. Administration can be systemic or local.
  • the compounds for use according to the present invention are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebuliser, with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • the dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount.
  • Capsules and cartridges of e.g. gelatin for use in an inhaler or insufflator may be formulated containing a powder mix of the compound and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.
  • the compound can be delivered in a vesicle, in particular a liposome (see Langer, Science 249: 1527-1533 (1990); Treat et al., in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 353-365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 317-327; see generally ibid.)
  • the compound can be delivered in a controlled release system.
  • a pump may be used (see Langer, supra; Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref. Biomed. Eng 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et al, Surgery 88:507 (1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl J. Med. 321 :574 (1989)).
  • polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Florida (1974); Controlled Dmg Bioavailability, Dmg Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J.
  • a controlled release system can be placed in proximity of the therapeutic target, i.e., the brain, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115- 138 (1984)).
  • the nucleic acid can be administered in vivo to promote expression of its encoded peptide or polypeptide, by constmcting it as part of an appropriate nucleic acid expression vector and administering it so that it becomes intracellular, e.g., by use of a retroviral vector (see U.S. Patent No.
  • a nucleic acid can be introduced intracellularly and incorporated within host cell DNA for expression, by homologous recombination.
  • compositions comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable means approved by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals, and more particularly in humans.
  • carrier refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient, or vehicle with which the therapeutic is administered.
  • Such pharmaceutical carriers can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like.
  • Water is a preferred carrier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously.
  • Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions.
  • Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like.
  • the composition if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents.
  • compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like.
  • the composition can be formulated as a suppository, with traditional binders and carriers such as triglycerides. Examples of suitable pharmaceutical carriers are described in "Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences” by E.W. Martin.
  • Such compositions will contain a therapeutically effective amount of the compound, preferably in purified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient.
  • the formulation should suit the mode of administration.
  • the composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous administration to human beings.
  • compositions for intravenous administration are solutions in sterile isotonic aqueous buffer.
  • the composition may also include a solubilizing agent and a local anesthetic such as lignocaine to ease pain at the site of the injection.
  • the ingredients are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent.
  • compositions may take the form of, for example, tablets or capsules prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients such as binding agents (e.g., pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose); fillers (e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogen phosphate); lubricants (e.g.
  • Liquid preparations for oral administration may take the form of, for example, solutions, syrups or suspensions, or they may be presented as a dry product for constitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use.
  • Such liquid preparations may be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents (e.g., sorbitol syrup, cellulose derivatives or hydrogenated edible fats); emulsifying agents (e.g., lecithin or acacia); non-aqueous vehicles (e.g., almond oil, oily esters, ethyl alcohol or fractionated vegetable oils); and preservatives (e.g., methyl or propyl-p-hydroxybenzoates or sorbic acid).
  • suspending agents e.g., sorbitol syrup, cellulose derivatives or hydrogenated edible fats
  • emulsifying agents e.g., lecithin or acacia
  • non-aqueous vehicles e.g., almond oil, oily esters, ethyl alcohol or fractionated vegetable oils
  • preservatives e.g., methyl or propyl-p-hydroxybenzoates or sorbic acid.
  • the preparations may also contain buffer salt
  • the compounds can be formulated as neutral or salt forms.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those formed with free amino groups such as those derived from hydrochloric, phosphoric, acetic, oxalic, tartaric acids, etc., and those formed with free carboxyl groups such as those derived from sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, ferric hydroxides, isopropylamine, triethylamine, 2-ethylamino ethanol, histidine, procaine, etc.
  • Suppositories generally contain active ingredient in the range of 0.5% to 10% by weight; oral formulations preferably contain 10% to 95% active ingredient.
  • the invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention.
  • a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention.
  • Optionally associated with such container(s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale of pharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflects approval by the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration.
  • an oligopeptide of the invention is targeted directly to the cytoplasm and/or nucleus of a cell.
  • the targeting system employed is a penetratin or "trojan peptide" targeting system (Derossi, et al., 1998, Trends Cell Biol. 8:84-87).
  • the trojan peptide targeting system employs a fusion protein created using standard methods of recombinant polypeptide technology.
  • the fusion protein comprises an oligopeptide sequence to be internalized fused to a trojan peptide intemalization vector, e.g., penetratin- 1 or Antennapedia homeodomain (Antp-HD).
  • the oligopeptide "cargo" and the trojan peptide vector may be coupled by several methods including, but not limited to, 1) chemical synthesis and coupling in which the cargo and the trojan vector are synthesized separately and attached through a disulfide bond; 2) chemical synthesis in tandem in which a peptidic cargo is synthesized in tandem with a trojan vector; and 3) an in vitro recombination approach in which fusion peptides comprising the third helix of Antp-HD, a tag (e.g., myc) and a cargo are expressed in E. coli and purified (Derossi, et al., 1998, Trends Cell Biol. 8:84-87).
  • the trojan peptide targeting system may be used to target intemalization of fusion proteins of at least 100 amino acids, and possibly longer, depending on the stmcture of the cargo.
  • the fusion proteins are preincubated with small amounts of SDS or polysialic acid to mask positive charges and prevent peptide degradation.
  • SDS or polysialic acid to mask positive charges and prevent peptide degradation.
  • Such treatment blocks instantaneous intemalization, and allows slow diffusion and progressive release when the fusion protein is administered in the peritoneal cavity (Derossi, et al., 1998, Trends Cell Biol. 8:84-87).
  • the yeast interactive trap system was used to identify a cellular protein which interacts with the nucleoprotein of influenza A vimses.
  • This protein, nucleoprotein interactor 1 (NPI-1) is the human homologue of the yeast protein SRP1.
  • SRP1 was previously identified as a suppressor of temperature-sensitive RNA polymerase I mutations (Yano, et. al., 1992, Mol. Cell. Biol. 12:5640-5651).
  • a full length cDNA clone of NPI-1 was generated from HeLa cell poly A+ RNA.
  • the viral NP which had been partially purified from influenza A/PR/8/34 vims-infected embryonated eggs, could be coprecipitated from solution by glutathione agarose beads complexed with a bacterially expressed glutathione-S-transferase (GST)-NPI-l fusion protein, confirming the results of the yeast genetic system.
  • GST glutathione-S-transferase
  • Antisera raised against NPI-1 identified a 65 kDa polypeptide from total cellular extracts of both HeLa and MDBK cells.
  • influenza vims replication was co- immunoprecipitated from influenza A/WSN/33 vims-infected HeLa cells by antisera directed against NPI-1, demonstrating an interaction of these two proteins in infected cells, and suggesting that NPI-1 plays a role during influenza vims replication.
  • YEAST. BACTERIA AND PLASMIDS Yeast strain EGY48 (Mata trpl uraS his3 LEU2::pLEXAop6-LEU2) (Zervos, et al., 1993, Cell 72: 222-232) and plasmids pEG202, pSH18-34, and pRFHMl and the HeLa cell cDNA library constructed in pJG4-5 (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803) were previously described. Similar versions of these plasmids and this yeast host strain are available commercially from Clontech as part of a two fusion protein system.
  • pLexA-NP was constmcted by subcloning the cDNA of influenza A/PR/8/34 NP as a LexA translational fusion gene into pEG202 (Fig. 1). Yeast strains constmcted as part of these studies are described in Table 2. Escherichia coli MH3 (trpC araD lacXhsdR galU galK) and W31005 were previously described (Hall, et al., 1984, Cell 36: 1057-1065).
  • Each isolated plasmid was introduced into strains R101 and R102. These strains harbor pSH18- 34, a reporter plasmid encoding ⁇ -galactosidase with a GAL1 promoter transcriptionally controlled from upstream LexA binding sites. Strain R102 was used as a negative control for NP-specificity of cloned cDNAs. It contains pRFHMl , which encodes LexA fused to a transcriptionally inert fragment of the Drosophila melanogaster bicoid protein.
  • ⁇ -Galactosidase activity was assayed on nitrocellulose replicas of the colonies by freeze fracturing the cells and incubating in buffer containing 5-bromo-4-chloro-3-indolyl- ⁇ -D- galactoside (X-gal) (Miller, 1972, Experiments in Molecular Genetics, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY). Plasmids which conferred both a leu+ and ⁇ - gal+ phenotypes in the presence of pLexA-NP but not in the presence of pRFHMl were saved for further study.
  • NPI-1 The 5' terminus of NPI-1 was cloned by rapid amplification of cDNA ends ("RACE") by the method of Frohman (Frohman, 1990, in PCR Protocols: A Guide to Methods and Applications, Innis, et. al., eds., Academic Press Inc., San Diego, p. 28-38; Frohman, et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85: 8998-9002).
  • RACE rapid amplification of cDNA ends
  • Reverse transcription of 1 ⁇ g of poly A+ HeLa cell RNA was performed using the NPI-1 specific oligonucleotide 5'GCAAAGCAGGAGAAACCAC3' (SEQ ID NO:24).
  • First strand cDNA was tailed with dCTP by terminal transferase.
  • PCR amplification of the reverse transcription product was performed with the nested NPI-1 primer 5'GGGTCCATCTGATAGATATGAGAG3' (SEQ ID NO:25) and the 5' RACE anchor primer
  • Bacteria were pelleted 4 h after induction, washed in ice cold phosphate buffered saline (PBS), and resuspended in one-tenth culture volume PBS+1 Triton X-100. Bacteria were lysed on ice with four 15 s pulses in a Raytheon sonicator at an output setting of 1 amp. Insoluble material was pelleted at 50,000xg for 30 min in a Beckman TL-100.3 rotor.
  • PBS ice cold phosphate buffered saline
  • GST-NPI-1 and GST were purified from bacterial lysates on glutathione-agarose beads (Sigma Chemical Corporation.). Beads were swelled according to the manufacturer's instmctions and equilibrated in PBS. Typical binding reactions were done in 500 ⁇ l of PBS/0.1 Triton X-100, and included 50 ⁇ l bacterial lysate and 10 ⁇ l of a 50 slurry of glutathione-agarose beads. Binding reactions were incubated for 5 min at room temperature on a rotating wheel. Beads were collected by centrifugation for 5 s in a microfuge, and were washed three times in PBS.
  • NP BINDING ASSAY To assay binding of NP to GST-NPI-1 /bead complexes typical reactions were performed in 500 ⁇ l of ice cold PBS+0.05 Nonidet P-40 and contained washed GST-NP1- 1/bead complexes and 10 ⁇ g partially purified influenza vims polymerase and nucleoprotein preparations (Pol/NP). Vims was prepared from embryonated eggs infected by influenza A/PR/8/34 vims and POL/NP preparations were purified as previously described (Enami, et al., 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87: 3802-3805; Parvin, et al., 1989, J. Virol.
  • NP was bound for 1 h at 4°C on a rotating wheel. Beads were collected by centrifugation for 5 s in a microfuge, and were washed three times in PBS+0.05 NP-40. Washed beads were resuspended in 50 ⁇ l SDS sample buffer (Sambrook, et al., 1989, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratories Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY), boiled for 5 min, and pelleted in a microfuge. 10 ⁇ l of each supernatant was separated by electrophoresis on a 12.5 SDS-polyacrylamide gel. Gels were either stained with Coomassie blue or processed for immunoblot analysis. NP was detected by immunoblotting with the monoclonal antibody HT103.
  • ANTISERA AND IMMUNOBLOTTING Polyclonal rabbit antisera against NPI-1 was generated by immunization of a female NZY Rabbit (Buckshire Farms) with 200 ⁇ g of purified GST-NPI-1 in complete Freund's adjuvant, followed by two boosts of 100 ⁇ g in incomplete Freund's adjuvant at three week intervals. The specificity of antisera was demonstrated by immunoblot analysis of GST- NPI-1 in bacterial lysates. Immunoblots were performed by standard methods (Harlow and Lane, 1988, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratories Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY). Sera were used at a dilution of 1 :1000.
  • VIRUSES AND CELLS Total cell lysates from HeLa and MDBK cells were generated by direct lysing of cells in SDS-sample buffer, followed by shearing of chromosomal DNA by passage through a 21 ga. syringe.
  • Cytoplasmic extracts were generated by lysing cells in ice cold NP-40 lysis buffer (10 mM Tris-CI, pH 8.0; 100 mM NaCI; 1 mM EDTA; 1 mM DTT; 1 Nonidet P-40; 1 mM 4-(2-aminoethyl)benzenesulfonylfluoride-hydrochloride (Pefabloc)). After 10 min on ice nuclei were removed by centrifugation. Proteins were separated by SDS-PAGE, transferred to nitrocellulose and visualized by immunoblotting.
  • HeLa cells were infected with influenza A/WSN/33 vims at a multiplicity of 10 for 45 min at 37°C. Infection was allowed to proceed in DMEM + 0.1 BSA for 5 h at which time cells were labeled with 50 ⁇ Ci 35 S-methionine + 50 ⁇ Ci 35 S-cystine in MEM-cys-met for 1 h. Extracts were prepared by resuspending infected cells in 650 ⁇ l ice cold NP-40 lysis buffer followed by two 15 s pulses in a Raytheon sonicator to dismpt nuclei.
  • Insoluble cell debris was removed by centrifugation at 100,000xg in a TL- 100.3 Beckman rotor. 5 ⁇ l anti-NPI-1 sera was incubated on ice for 1 h with 100 ⁇ l infected cell lysates. Immune complexes were precipitated from solution by incubation with Sepharose-4B linked protein G beads (Sigma Chemical Co.) for 1 h. Beads were collected by centrifugation, washed three times in NP- 40 lysis buffer, and resuspended in SDS-sample buffer. Precipitated proteins were separated by SDS-PAGE and visualized by autoradiography.
  • the interactive trap was used to identify proteins which specifically interact with the influenza A virus nucleoprotein (NP).
  • NP influenza A virus nucleoprotein
  • the interactive trap is one of several genetic systems recently developed which uses the modular nature of transcription activators to detect protei protein interactions (Chien, et al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88: 9578-9582; Dalton & Treisman, 1992, Cell 68: 597-612; Durfee, et al., 1993, Genes Dev.
  • the interactive trap consists of three components: (1) a reporter gene that has no basal transcription; (2) a fusion protein which contains a LexA DNA binding domain that is transcriptionally inert; and (3) proteins encoded by an expression library, which are expressed as fusion proteins containing an activation domain (Fig. 1 A).
  • Strain R100 (Table II), which contains pLexA-NP, was transformed with a HeLa cell cDNA library constmcted in pJG4-5.
  • pJG4-5 contains an activation domain under control of a GAL1 promoter (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803).
  • NPI-1 is the human homologue of the yeast SRP1 gene (infra).
  • the 2.1 kbp NPI-1 cDNA in pJG4-5 was sequenced by standard protocols.
  • the 5' cDNA terminus of the NPI-1 gene was cloned by 5' RACE.
  • cDNAs from 3 independently derived NPI-1 5'RACE products were cloned and sequenced.
  • Nucleotide and derived amino acid sequences of NPI-1 are shown in Figure 2.
  • the carboxyl terminal 265 amino acids were encoded by the interactive trap library plasmid and interact with the viral NP.
  • NPI-1 is the human homologue of the Saccharomyces cerevisiae protein SRPl (Yano, et al., 1992, Mol. and Cell. Biol. 12: 5640-5651).
  • SRPl was cloned as an allele-specific suppressor of ts mutations in the zinc-binding domain of the A 190 subunit of RNA polymerase I.
  • the amino acid sequence is highly conserved between NPI-1 and SRPl : 50% identity and 81% similarity at the amino acid level.
  • NPI-1 has a potential nuclear localization signal (Chelsky, et al., 1989, Mol. Cell. Biol. 9:2487-2492); amino acids 25 to 49 are rich in arginine, and contain a stretch of four consecutive arginines at amino acids 28 to 31.
  • NPI-1 like SRPl, contains a series of 8 consecutive ARM motifs, which are 42 amino acid protein subsequences originally identified in the Drosophila armadillo protein (Peifer, et al., Cell 76: 789-791, 1994; Yano, et al., 1992, Mol. and Cell. Biol. 12: 5640-5651) (Fig. 3, infra).
  • NPI-1 BINDS TO NP IN VITRO the NPI-1 cDNA fragment (amino acids 262 to 527) was subcloned into the bacterial expression vector pGEX-5X-l yielding a glutathione S-transferase fusion gene.
  • the expressed fusion protein was purified from bacterial lysates on glutathione agarose beads.
  • NP which had been partially purified with the viral polymerase from influenza A/PR/8/34 vims was specifically precipitated from solution by glutathione agarose beads complexed with GST-NPI-1 (Fig. 4).
  • the NP band migrates slightly faster than that of the GST-NPI-1 fusion protein. The identity of this protein was confirmed by immunoblot analysis using the anti-NP monoclonal antibody HT103 (Fig. 4, lane 8).
  • NPI-1 INTERACTS WITH NP IN INFECTED CELLS Since NP formed a complex with NPI-1 in vitro, whether NP and NPI-1 form a complex in infected cells was examined. NP was specifically coimmunoprecipitated from extracts of influenza A/WSN vims infected HeLa cells by antisera directed against NPI-1 10 (Fig. 6). This demonstrates an interaction of the viral NP and the cellular NPI-1 during influenza A vims infection.
  • yeast interactive trap system was used to identify a human protein, NSl I-l (NSl -interactor- 1), from a HeLa cell cDNA library on the basis of its binding to NSl of influenza A vims.
  • NSl I-l is shown herein to be recognized not only by NSl proteins from five human and avian influenza A strains, but also by NSl of
  • NSl I-l is homologous to a steroid dehydrogenase isolated from pigs (Leenders, et al., 1994, Eur. J. Biochem. 222: 221-227).
  • proteins with a dehydrogenase function have recently been shown not only to have enzymatic activity but also to be involved in post-transcriptional events of gene-expression (Hentze, 1994, Trends
  • yeast strains EGY40 (Mat a trpl ura3 his 3) and EGY48 (Mata trpl ura3 his 3 LEU2::pLEX-Aop6-LEU2) as well as plasmids pEG202, pRFHMl, and pSH18-34, and the HeLa cell cDNA constmcted in pJG4-5 have been described (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75:
  • E. coli strains used for cloning and expression were MH3 (trpC araD lacX hsdR galU galK), DH5 ⁇ (F ' ⁇ 80dlacZ ⁇ M15 ⁇ (lacZY-argF)U169 deoR recAl endAl hsdR17(r K -m K +) supE44 ⁇ -thi- gyrA96 relAl), and BL26 (F ompT hsdS B (r B " m B " ) gal dcm).
  • pLexA-NSl was constmcted by subcloning the cDNA of the NS segment of influenza vims A/PR/8/34 downstream of the LexA gene in pEG202.
  • pGEX-NSlI-1 was constmcted by subcloning the HeLa cDNA-insert of library plasmid pK5 as an EcoRI/XboI-fragment into pGEX-5X-l (Pharmacia).
  • DNA- oligonucleotides used were: GSP-I, 5'-dTCCTGATGTTGCTGTAGACG-3' (SEQ ID NO:27), GSP-II, 5'-dGCACGACTAGTATGATTTGC-3 * (SEQ ID NO:28), and the 5'RACE anchor primer (BRL), 5'-dCUACUACUACUAGGCCACGCGTCGACTACTACGGGIIGGGIIGGGIIG-3' (SEQ ID NO:26).
  • the interactive trap selection was performed essentially as described for NPI-1 in Section 6.1.2, above.
  • the selection strain was constmcted by transforming EGY48 with the bait plasmid pLexA-NSl and the lacZ-reporter plasmid pSHl 8-34. Expression of lacZ from pSH 18-34 is transcriptionally controlled by a GAL1 promoter and LexA-dependent operator sites.
  • a HeLa cell cDNA library was introduced into the selection strain using the lithium acetate method (Ito, et al., 1983, J. Bacteriol. 153: 163-168). Primary transformants were selected on trp ' his ura ' glucose plates.
  • Plasmid DNA was isolated from yeast clones expressing ⁇ - galactosidase activity only on galactose plates and library plasmids were recovered by transformation into E.coli MH3 as described in Section 6.1.2, above. The specificity of the isolated plasmids was tested by co-transformation with pLexA-NSl or pRFHMl into
  • pRFHMl expresses an unrelated LexA-bicoid fusion protein.
  • the resulting strains were assayed for ⁇ -galactosidase activity on X-gal trp ' his ' ura " plates containing glucose or galactose. Plasmids that induced ⁇ -galactosidase only in the presence of galactose and only in conjunction with pLexA-NSl were considered to encode tme interacting proteins. 7.1.3.
  • First strand cDNA was synthesized from 1 ⁇ g of HeLa cell poly(A)-RNA hybridized to 2.5 pmol NSl I-l -specific oligonucleotide
  • GSP-I using reverse transcriptase.
  • the cDNA was tailed at the 5'-end with dC by terminal transferase.
  • the product was used as a template for the amplification of a 5'RACE-product by PCR using a nested oligonucleotide GSP-II and an anchor primer provided by the kit.
  • the resulting fragment was subcloned in pGEM-T (Promega) to form pRACENSlI-1, and sequenced by the standard dideoxy method.
  • the NCBI-search was conducted using Fasta,
  • Infection was continued at 37°C (influenza A vimses) or 35 °C (influenza B/Lee/40) for 5 hours in MEM-medium containing 0.1 bovine semm albumin.
  • Cells were labeled with 100 ⁇ Ci of 35 S-methionine and 35 S-cysteine (ICN) per dish for one hour in MEM-met cys -medium. Cells were washed and scraped in ice-cold phosphate buffered saline (PBS).
  • PBS ice-cold phosphate buffered saline
  • NSl I-l was expressed in E. coli BL26 from pGEX-NSlI-1 as a GST (glutathione-S- transferase)-NSH-l fusion protein with a predicted molecular weight of 77 kDa.
  • GST-NSl I-l was induced using isopropyl- ⁇ -D-galactopyranoside essentially as described (Smith & Johnson, 1988, Gene 67: 31-40).
  • GST-NS1I-1 was adsorbed from bacterial lysates to glutathione sepharose beads (Pharmacia) as recommended by the manufacturer. Beads were washed three times with PBS to remove contaminating proteins.
  • GST protein was expressed in BL26 from pGEX-5X-l and used the same way in the co-precipitation assay.
  • the yeast interaction trap system (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803; Zervos, et al., 1993, Cell 72: 222-232) was used to identify cellular proteins that interact with the nonstmctural protein NSl of influenza A vims.
  • a LexA-NSl fusion protein was used as bait to screen library in which HeLa cell cDNAs were expressed as fusions with an acidic transcription activation domain (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803, #159). Colonies were selected, in which either of two reporter genes, LEU2 and lacZ, were activated by the cDNA-encoded proteins. This double selection scheme was used to increase the stringency, because in an initial screen a high proportion of candidates scored negative in subsequent genetic tests.
  • the library plasmids were isolated from the selected clones.
  • the binding specificity of the encoded fusion proteins was tested by assaying the activation of a lacZ-reporter gene encoded on pSH 18-34. Expression of ⁇ -galactosidase from this plasmid is transcriptionally controlled by LexA-specific operator sites.
  • the isolated library plasmids were co-transformed with pLexA-NSl or pRFHMl into EGY40 harboring pSH 18-34.
  • pRFHMl expresses a LexA-bicoid fusion protein and was used as a non-specific operator-binding control.
  • the resulting strains were assayed for ⁇ - galactosidase activity specifically on X-gal plates containing galactose, but not glucose.
  • cDNA 10 1781 bp with an open reading frame of 1413 nucleotides followed by 368 nucleotides of a potentially untranslated region (Fig. 12).
  • the cDNA terminated with an oligo(A)-tract and had a consensus poly(A)-site at positions 2526-2531.
  • Northern blot analysis of HeLa cell poly(A)-RNA using a NSl I-l -specific probe detected one single transcript of about 3.0 kb suggesting that the pK5 insert represented an incomplete cDNA (Fig. 13). The remaining
  • NSlI-1 cDNA 15 NSlI-1 cDNA was cloned by a 5'RACE procedure (Frohman, et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85: 8998-9002).
  • Four independent clones were sequenced that differed only in length at the very 5'-end.
  • the longest 5'RACE product, contained in pRACENSlI-1 extended the NSl I-l sequence for 893 nucleotides upstream totaling in a cDNA of 2674 bp (Fig. 12).
  • the sequence has one long open reading frame encoding a protein of 735 amino 0 acids with a predicted molecular mass of 79.5 kDa and a pi of 9.06.
  • the putative ATG-start codon is located 103 nucleotides downstream of the 5 '-end and is in the context of a sequence consistent with its being a translational start (Kozak, 1989, J. Cell Biol. 108: 229- 241).
  • NSl I-l cDNA also shows strong homology to ten human cDNA fragments that have been 0 isolated as expressed sequence tags, as revealed by a BLAST-analysis of the NCBI-database (fragments are between 134 to 556 bp in length). These cDNAs were derived from different tissues including liver, spleen, brain, adipose tissue, and adrenals tissue indicating a broad expression of NSl I-l in the body.
  • the encoded NSl I-l protein features two conserved sequence motifs of the short- 5 chain alcohol dehydrogenase family (Persson, et al., 1991, Eur. J. Biochem. 200: 537-543). Specifically, amino acids 15 to 22 (TGAGAGCG; SEQ ID NO:29) are similar to the potential co-factor binding site, and residues 163 to 167 (YSAAK; SEQ ID NO:30) correspond to a short stretch that has been suggested to participate in catalysis (Chen, et al., 1993, Biochemistry 32: 3342-3346). The presence of the tri-peptide AKL at the carboxy- terminus was also noted.
  • a co-precipitation assay was performed as similarly described in Section 6.2.3, above, for NPI-1.
  • a glutathione-S-transferase (GST)-NSlI-l fusion gene was constmcted and expressed in E.coli.
  • GST-NSl I-l fusion protein from bacterial lysate was absorbed to the affinity matrix glutathione agarose and purified from contaminating bacterial proteins.
  • the immobilized fusion protein was used to bind and precipitate 35 S-labeled proteins from extracts of MDCK cells infected with human influenza A/WSN/33 vimses (Fig. 14).
  • the NSl protein of this strain is 98 identical to its counterpart from A/PR/8/34 used in the yeast interaction screen. Aliquots of the same extract were used to in parallel reactions to immunoprecipitate influenza vims proteins NSl and Ml . The precipitated proteins were analyzed by SDS-gel electrophoresis and visualized by fluorography. Fig. 14 shows, that GST-NSl I-l efficiently precipitated a protein band co- migrating with immunoprecipitated NS 1 protein from infected cell extract (compare lanes 2 and 3). This interaction was specific for NSl I-l since no proteins were detected in precipitates using GST only (lane 6).
  • yeast interactive trap system (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803; Zervos, et al., 1993. Cell 72: 223-232) was used to screen for cellular proteins that interact with the NS 1 protein and to identify and characterize a human 70 kDa protein, termed NSl -binding protein (NSl-BP), which interacts with the nonstmctural NSl protein of the influenza A vims.
  • NSl-BP NSl -binding protein
  • the genetic interaction was confirmed by the specific coprecipitation of the NSl protein from solution by a GST-NS 1-BP fusion protein and glutathione Sepharose in vitro.
  • NSl-BP contains an N-terminal BTB/POZ domain and five kelch-like tandem repeat elements of -50 amino acids.
  • affinity-purified antibodies localized NS 1 -BP in discrete nuclear domains which are enriched in spliceosome assembly factor SC35, a pre-mRNA splicing factor. This suggests an association of NSl-BP with the cellular splicing apparatus.
  • SC35 spliceosome assembly factor
  • VIRUSES, CELLS AND EXTRACTS Influenza A/WSN/33 vims was grown in the allantoic cavity of 10-day-old embryonated chicken eggs.
  • HeLa, Hep-2 and 293 cells were passaged in Dulbecco's modified Eagle's tissue culture medium (D-MEM) containing 10 fetal calf semm.
  • D-MEM Dulbecco's modified Eagle's tissue culture medium
  • confluent cell monolayers grown in 35 mm dishes were lysed in RIPA buffer containing 150 mM NaCI, 1.0 Nonidet P-40, 0.5 deoxycholate, 0.1 sodium dodecyl sulfate, 50 mM Tris/HCl, pH8.0.
  • Saccharomyces cerevisiae EGY48 (Mata trpl ura3 his3 LEU2::pLEX-Aop6- LEU2), plasmids pSH 18-34, pRFHMl and the HeLa cell cDNA expression library constmcted in pJG4-5 were kindly provided by R. Brent (Harvard Medical School) and have been described previously (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803; Zervos, et al., 1993,
  • Plasmid pGEX-NSl-BP was made by subcloning the HeLa cDNA from the library plasmid (see below) into pGEX-5X-l (Pharmacia).
  • the bacterial expression plasmids pGEX-NSl-BP-REP and pMAL-NS 1 -BP-REP were generated by inserting NSl- BP cDNA corresponding to amino acids 1-368 (nucleotide positions 1 to 1104) between the EcoRI/XhoI-sites of pGEX-5X-l (Pharmacia) and the EcoRI/Sall-sites of pMAL-c2 (New
  • the yeast interaction trap was used to identify and to isolate HeLa cell cDNAs r encoding NSl binding factors as was previously described (Wolff, et al., 1996, J. Virol. 70:
  • EGY48 was transformed with the bait plasmid pLexA-NSl and the lacZ reporter plasmid pSH18-34. Subsequently, this strain was transformed with a plasmid library, in which HeLa cell cDNAs were conditionally expressed as fusions with an acidic activation domain from a GAL1 promoter. 3.3 x 10 5 primary transformants were screened
  • n for interaction as determined by their ability to grow on minimal synthetic medium in the absence of leucine and to activate the lacZ reporter gene specifically on plates containing galactose but not glucose.
  • the library plasmid p59-l was isolated from one selected clone by transformation in E. coli MH3 as described elsewhere (O'Neill, et al., 1994, Virology
  • the cDNA was tailed with dC using terminal transferase.
  • the product was used as a template to amplify double stranded cDNA by PCR with the nested primer 59GSP2 (dCCACCTGCAGCTATGAG (SEQ ID NO:32), positions 1108 to 1124) and the 5'RACE anchor primer.
  • the resulting product was subcloned into pGEM-T (Promega) to generate pGEM-NS 1 -BP-5'RACE plasmids.
  • the NS 1 -BP cDNA was sequenced by the standard dideoxy method.
  • NSl-BP amino acids 347-619 was expressed from pGEX-NSl-BP as a glutathione- S-transferase (GST) fusion protein in E. coli BL26.
  • GST-NS 1-BP was induced by addition of 1 mM isopropyl- ⁇ -D-galactopyranoside (IPTG).
  • IPTG isopropyl- ⁇ -D-galactopyranoside
  • NSl protein was synthesized and labeled with [ 35 S]-methionine in coupled 50 ⁇ l transcription/translation reactions (Promega-TNT, Promega) programmed with pcDNA3-NSl.
  • the translation reaction was mixed with 10 ⁇ l coated glutathione Sepharose beads in 750 ⁇ l of HN100 buffer (20 mM Hepes, pH8.0, 100 mM NaCI, 0.01 Nonidet P40 [NP-40]) for 2 h at 4°C.
  • the beads were washed three times with PBS/ 0.01 NP-40 and the precipitated proteins were separated by SDS gel electrophoresis and visualized by autoradiography.
  • the GST-NSl -BP-REP fusion protein carrying amino acids 1-368 of NSl-BP was expressed in E. coli BL26 transformed with pGEX-NSl -BP-REP and affinity-purified on glutathione Sepharose resin (Pharmacia) as recommended by the manufacturer. A six month
  • n old female rabbit was immunized with 400 ⁇ g purified GST-NSl -BP-REP fusion protein in complete Freund's adjuvant followed by booster injections of 250 ⁇ g fusion protein in incomplete adjuvant at a four week interval.
  • NSl-BP-specific antibodies were purified from semm by affinity-chromatography using an antigen-resin. For the constmction of this matrix, a MAL-N SI -BP-REP fusion protein in which the maltose-binding protein of E. coli
  • ⁇ was fused to amino acids 1-368 of NSl-BP was expressed in E. coli XLl-Blue cells and affinity-purified on an amylose affinity column (New England Biolabs).
  • the MAL-NS1- BP-REP fusion protein was immobilized on CNBr-activated Sepharose (Pharmacia) and the resulting resin was used for the affinity-purification of NSl-BP-specific antibodies as described elsewhere (Harlow, et al., 1988, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring
  • Affinity-purified anti-NS 1 -BP antibodies and the NS 1 -specific monoclonal antibody IA7 were used at 1 :100 dilutions.
  • the anti-SC35 antibody (Fu, et al., 1990, Nature 343: 437- ,,- 441) was purchased from Pharmingen Inc. and used at a dilution of 1 :1000.
  • the cells were washed and incubated with fluorescein isothiocyanate (FITC)-conjugated sheep anti-rabbit immunoglobulin G (IgG) and or Texas Red-conjugated goat anti-mouse IgG.
  • FITC fluorescein isothiocyanate
  • IgG immunoglobulin G
  • Texas Red-conjugated goat anti-mouse IgG Texas Red-conjugated goat anti-mouse IgG.
  • coverslips were washed and mounted in MOWIOL 4-88 (Calbiochem) as described (Harlow, et al., 1988, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, NY).
  • MOWIOL 4-88 Calbiochem
  • cells were viewed on a Zeiss Axiovert 100 fluorescence microscope using a 63x objective and photographs were captured by a CF8/10x video camera (Kappa GmBH).
  • a Zeiss LSM 410 Invert microscope equipped with a lOOx objective lens was used for confocal laser scanning microscopy. Digitized images were pseudocolored using PHOTOSHOP® software (Adobe Systems Inc.).
  • GST, GST-NSl and GST-NS 1-BP fusion proteins were expressed in E.coli BL26 and affinity-purified on glutathione Sepharose (Pharmacia) columns as recommended by the manufacturer.
  • GST proteins were eluted with 20 mM glutathione in 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 8.0, dialyzed versus buffer D (20 mM Hepes, pH 8.0, 100 mM KC1, 20 glycerol, 0.2 mM EDTA, 0.5 mM DTT) and stored at -80 °C. The purity of the prepared proteins was tested by SDS gel electrophoresis and staining by Coomassie Blue.
  • HeLa cell nuclear extract was prepared as described (Dignam, et al., 1983, Nucleic Acids Res. 11 : 1475-1489).
  • 32 P- labelled MINX pre-mRNA was synthesized as described (Wolff, et al., 1992, EMBO J. 11 : 345-359).
  • 4 ng of pre-mRNA were incubated in a 100 ⁇ l volume containing 40 HeLa cell nuclear extract, 3.2 mM MgCl 2 , 0.5 mM ATP, 20 mM creatine phosphate, 60 mM KC1.
  • NSl-BP cDNA and its derived amino acid sequence were compared to the GenBank and EMBL databases using the FASTA and TFASTA software (Deveraux, et al., 1984, Nucleic Acids Res. 12: 387-395).
  • the PILEUP and PRETTY programs of the Genetics Computer Group were used to align the repeat elements of NSl-BP and to create a consensus sequence. 8.2. RESULTS
  • the yeast interaction trap system (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803; Zervos, et al., 1993, Cell 72: 223-232) was used to identify cellular proteins that bind to the NSl protein of the influenza A vims (Wolff, et al., 1996, J. Virol. 70: 5363-5372).
  • a constitutively expressed LexA-NS 1 fusion protein was used to screen a HeLa cell cDNA plasmid library, in which cDNA-encoded proteins were conditionally expressed as translational fusions with an acidic activation domain from a GAL1 promoter.
  • NSl-BP cDNA p59-l had a 1.2 kb cDNA insert containing one long open reading frame of 819 bp followed by 338 bp of an untranslated region that terminated in a run of 20 adenosines (Fig. 16).
  • Northern blot analysis of HeLa cell poly(A)-RNA was used to determine if the size of the isolated HeLa cDNA corresponded to a complete copy of NSl-BP mRNA.
  • a 32 P-labeled NSl -BP-specific probe hybridized mainly to an RNA species of approximately 3.1 kb in size (Fig. 17).
  • the initiator ATG codon of the open reading frame is in a sequence context which is compatible with being a translational start site (Kozak, 1989, J. Cell Biol. 108: 229-241).
  • Analysis of the sequence of NSl-BP revealed the presence of five imperfect repeat elements of 47-49 amino acids at the C-terminal region between amino acids 368 to 607 (Fig. 18). These tandem repeats are 18 to 41 identical to each other and five positions are invariant between domains.
  • NSl-BP The cDNA and the deduced amino acid sequence of NSl-BP were compared to sequences in the GenBank and EMBL databases using the FASTA and TFASTA algorithms (Deveraux, et al., 1984, Nucleic Acids Res. 12: 387-395). Two regions of NSl-BP were identified which had homology to other proteins. First, the N-terminal - 120 amino acids of NSl-BP are homologous to the BTB (bric-a-brac, tramtrack, broad complex)/POZ (poxvimses and zinc fingers) domain that was identified in several zinc finger proteins known to act as transcriptional regulators (Bardwell, et al., 1994, Genes Dev.
  • the five tandem repeats located between NSl-BP residues 368 and 607 are homologous to the 50 amino acid kelch motif that was originally found in the Drosophila Kelch protein (Bork, et al., 1994, J. Mol. Biol. 236: 1277-1282; Xue, et al., 1993, Cell 72: 681-693).
  • the Kelch protein is a component of the intercellular ring canals in the Drosophila egg chamber.
  • the Kelch protein also contains a predicted BTB/POZ domain.
  • the NSl-BP is 31 identical in amino acid sequence to Kelch.
  • proteins were identified which have both kelch and BTB/POZ domains. These include the murine ENC-1 protein which is specifically expressed in the nervous system (Hernandez, et al., 1997, J.
  • the functions of the viral gene products are not known.
  • Several cellular kelch-repeat proteins containing no BTB/POZ domains were found, including the ⁇ - and ⁇ -scmin proteins which are expressed in the sperm of the horseshoe crab L. polyphemus (Way, et al., 1995, J. Cell Sci. 108: 3155-3162; Way, M., et al., 1995. J. Cell Biol. 128: 51-60), the products of the mouse intracistemal A particle- promoted placenta (MIPP) gene (Chang- Yeh, et al., 1991, Nucl. Acids Res. 19: 3667-3672) and the spe26 gene of C.
  • MIPP mouse intracistemal A particle- promoted placenta
  • NSl PROTEIN BINDS TO NSl-BP IN VITRO To confirm the interaction of NSl and the NSl-BP in vitro, binding assays were performed.
  • NSl-BP cDNA isolated through the library plasmid in the interaction trap screen (corresponding to NSl-BP amino acids 347-619) was fused to the glutathione-S-transferase (GST) gene in a bacterial expression vector.
  • GST-NS 1-BP fusion protein was expressed in E. coli and adsorbed to glutathione Sepharose beads.
  • glutathione Sepharose beads were prepared that were complexed with GST protein alone.
  • the NS 1 protein was synthesized in vitro and labeled with 35 S-methionine through coupled transcription translation reactions in reticulocyte lysates.
  • the coated glutathione Sepharose beads were incubated with the radiolabeled NSl protein.
  • the NSl protein was efficiently precipitated by the GST-NS 1-BP fusion protein, but not by GST (Fig. 19, lanes GST, GST- NS 1-BP). This result confirms the yeast two-hybrid data and shows that the viral NSl protein can also physically interact with the cellular NSl-BP.
  • NSl-BP-specific antibodies were raised against recombinant NSl-BP and used to analyze the concentration and intracellular localization of NSl-BP in mammalian cells.
  • Immunoblot analyses of the human epithelial-derived Hep-2, 293 and HeLa cell lines by NSl -BP-specific antibodies detected a protein doublet band with a molecular mass of about 70 kDa (Fig. 20). This is the predicted size for a protein derived from the NSl-BP open reading frame.
  • Two minor protein bands migrating at 65 kDa and 50 kDa were stained at variable intensity and may correspond to NSl-BP break-down products.
  • NSl-BP-specific antibodies were affinity-purified from immune semm and used for immunofluorescence analysis.
  • the speckle domains correspond ultrastructurally to interchromatin granules and perichromatin fibrils and are enriched in splicing snRNPs and non-snRNP splicing factors like SC35 and other SR proteins (reviewed by Spector, 1993, Annu. Rev. Cell Biol. 9: 265- 315).
  • splicing snRNPs and non-snRNP splicing factors like SC35 and other SR proteins
  • the viral NSl protein accumulates in the nucleus of cells infected with influenza A vims (Greenspan, et al., 1988, J. Virol. 62: 3020-3026; Young, et al., 1983, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 80: 6105).
  • Influenza A virus-infected cells were double immunostained with antibodies directed against the NSl-BP and the viral NSl or the cellular SC35 protein, respectively (Fig. 22).
  • the NSl protein localized predominantly to the nucleoplasm with some additional nucleolar signal (Fig. 22E).
  • Fig. 22E For the NSl-BP staining, a remarkable change was observed after infection by influenza vims.
  • the cellular NSl-BP was no longer found concentrated in the nuclear speckles, but was instead distributed throughout the nucleoplasm. Its distribution pattern was similar to that of the viral NSl protein except that there was no nucleolar signal (Fig. 22D, F). This redistribution of NSl-BP was observed in a few cells as early as four hours post infection. With ongoing infection, most of the cells expressing the viral NSl protein had an NSl-BP staining pattern similar to the one shown in figure 22D.
  • the intensity of the nuclear NSl-BP signal appeared to increase slightly in infected cells. However, no increase in the amount of NSl- BP in vims-infected cells by immunoblotting (data not shown) was detected. This suggests that NSl-BP epitopes are more easily accessible to antibodies in the nuclei of infected cells.
  • the intranuclear relocalization of NSl-BP in infected cells raised the question of whether the distribution of other proteins that normally localize to speckles would also change. Gross redistribution of proteins might occur if speckles break down during influenza virus infection. However, the staining of virus-infected cells with anti-SC35 antibody at 10 hours post infection (Fig. 22H) showed only a small change of the normal pattern.
  • the NS 1 protein can inhibit pre-mRNA splicing in vivo and in vitro (Fortes, et al., 1994, EMBO J. 13: 704-712; Lu, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8:1817-1828).
  • the block in splicing was assigned to a step after the assembly of spliceosomes, but before the first catalytic event (Lu, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8:1817-1828). It was hypothesized that the binding of the NSl protein to a cellular protein(s) whose
  • the A complex contains U2 snRNP and the B complex, which represents the fully assembled spliceosome, the U2, U4/U6 and US snRNPs (Konarska, et al., 1987, Cell 49: 763-774).
  • GST protein was added to nuclear extract did not change the splicing of the pre-mRNA nor did it interfere with the assembly
  • NS 1 is the only non-stmctural protein of influenza A vimses that is expressed in infected cells. Although the NSl protein has been implicated in several different processes including pre-mRNA splicing, mRNA transport and translation, little is known about specific cellular factors that are recognized by NS 1. Since NS 1 has pleiotropic effects, it may interact with a variety of proteins in infected cells thereby affecting different steps of cell metabolism. For example, NS 1 appears to be an auxiliary (vimlence) factor that plays a crucial role in inhibiting interferon-mediated antiviral responses of the host.
  • yeast interaction trap was used, as described supra, to screen a human cDNA expression library using a LexA-NSl fusion protein as bait.
  • NSl -I (NS 1 -interactor) which is a cytoplasmic 55 kDa protein that binds to the divergent NS 1 proteins expressed by influenza A and B vimses has been previously characterized (Wolff, et al., 1996, J. Virol. 70: 5363-5372).
  • NSl -I is derived from the precursor protein of a 17 ⁇ -estradiol dehydrogenase and its binding to NSl may have a function in modulating steroid hormone levels in virus-infected cells (Wolff, et al., 1996. J. Virol. 70: 5363-5372).
  • This example demonstrates the identification of the NSl-binding protein, NSl-BP, through its specific interaction with the NSl protein. This interaction was confirmed by the use of an in vitro binding assay.
  • the NS 1 protein co-precipitated with a GST-NS 1 -BP fusion protein, but not with GST alone demonstrating that NS 1 also physically binds to NSl-BP.
  • the analysis of the primary stmcture of the NSl-BP identified two regions with considerable homology to known proteins.
  • the amino-terminal 120 amino acids of NSl- BP are homologous to the BTB/POZ domain originally identified in a group of proteins that primarily regulate transcription (Bardwell, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8: 1664-1677; Zollmann, et al., 1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91 : 10717-10721).
  • BTB/POZ domains of brie a brae (bab), ZID, LAZ3/BCL6 and Kelch can mediate homo- and/or heterodimerization suggesting that BTB/POZ domains are a conserved protein-protein interaction motif (Bardwell, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8: 1664-1677; Chen, et al., 1995, Mol. Cell. Biol. 15: 3424-3429; Dhordain, et al., 1995, Oncogene 11 : 2689-2697; Dong, et al., 1996, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • kelch repeats appear to have diverged functions in the homologous proteins.
  • the kelch repeat fold contains the catalytic center of the enzyme (Ito, et al., 1991, Nature 350: 87-90).
  • the kelch elements of the ⁇ -scmin protein of L. polyphemus have been shown to bind to actin which lead to the proposal, that kelch repeats may constitute an actin-binding domain (Schmid, et al., 1994, J. Cell. Biol. 124: 341-350; Way, et al., 1995, J. Cell Biol. 128: 51-60).
  • the proteins encoded by different poxvimses that are homologous to NS 1 -BP have not been studied.
  • the genes of the vaccinia virus A55R, C2L and F3L ORF products could be deleted without affecting viral replication in tissue culture and are therefore considered to be non-essential (Kotwal, et al., 1988, Virology 167: 524-537; Perkus, et al., 1991, Virology 180: 406-410).
  • homologous proteins in different poxvimses argues for important roles of these proteins. For example, these gene products may increase vims vimlence or otherwise play a role in infected animals.
  • BP is concentrated in discrete regions in the nucleus of non- infected cells. This intracellular distribution is compatible with a function of the NSl-BP in gene regulation. Confocal double-immunostaining analyses of cells has previously demonstrated that the NSl-BP co- localizes in a speckled pattern with the spliceosome assembly factor SC35 (Fu, et al., 1990, Nature 343: 437-441). Several immunolocalization studies have shown that a number of other factors involved in pre-mRNA splicing, among them the spliceosomal snRNPs, also accumulate in the 20 to 50 irregularly shaped SC35 domains termed 'speckles' (reviewed by Spector, D. L. 1993.
  • speckle domains correspond to interchromatin granules and perichromatin fibrils (Fakan, 1994, Trends Cell Biol. 4: 86-90; Spector, et al., 1991, EMBO J. 10: 3467- 3481).
  • speckle domains localize near genes that are transcribed and spliced, it was suggested that speckles constitute a compartment in which pre-mRNA is actively spliced (Xing, et al., 1995, J. Cell Biol. 6:1635-1647).
  • RNA polymerase II transcripts were detected by Br- UTP labeling in a random distribution throughout the nucleoplasm (Fay, et al., 1997, Exp. Cell Res. 231: 27-37). Since splicing is thought to occur co-transcriptionally it was concluded by this group that pre-mRNA is processed throughout the nucleoplasm. For the speckle domains, a role as a storage or recycling compartment that supplies splicing factors
  • the intranuclear localization of the NSl-BP was drastically altered in influenza A vims-infected cells that expressed the NSl protein.
  • the speckled pattern was replaced by a
  • the NSl protein has previously been shown to inhibit pre-mRNA splicing in vitro 5 and in vivo (Fortes, et al., 1994, EMBO J. 13: 704-712; Lu, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8:1817- 1828). It was speculated that the inhibition of splicing would result in the retention of pre- mRNA in the nucleus of infected cells thereby increasing the concentration of mRNA cap stmctures available for cap-snatching by the viral RNA polymerase (Lu, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8:1817-1828).
  • the activity of the NSl protein may contribute to the 0 observed regulated splicing of the viral mRNAs derived from segments 7 and 8 (Smith, et al., 1985, EMBO J. 4: 2313-2319; Valcarel, et al., 1991, J. Gen. Virol. 72: 1301-1308). Because the cellular NSl-BP is concentrated in nuclear regions enriched in pre-mRNA splicing factors and it relocalizes in virus-infected cells, the role of NSl-BP in pre-mRNA splicing in vitro examined.
  • a tmncated NSl-BP was used as a potential non-functional 5 competitor of the endogenous protein in HeLa cell nuclear extract and the effects of this probe were compared to the known inhibition of pre-mRNA splicing by the NSl protein.
  • a similar experimental design has been used before by others to examine the role of the large subunit of RNA polymerase II in pre-mRNA splicing (Du, et al., 1997, J. Cell Biol. 136: 5- 18; Yuryev, A., et al., 1996. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93: 6975-6980). This example
  • the shortened NS 1 - BP that was used lacks the 346 N-terminal amino acids of the wild-type protein and was fused to the 26 kDa GST protein. This mutant NSl-BP protein is therefore unlikely to retain the full activity of the wild-type protein. However, the tmncated NSl-BP may still be able to interact with other essential splicing factors thereby preventing their association with the
  • NS 1 -BP is concentrated in intranuclear domains that are enriched with multiple splicing factors. This example demonstrates that the cellular NS 1 -BP is specifically relocalized in influenza A virus-infected cells that express the NS 1 protein.
  • NSl-BP 20 Redistribution of NSl-BP is likely to alter its function or activity.
  • the influenza A vims may thus inhibit host cell splicing in infected cells by the association of the viral NSl protein with the cellular NSl-BP.
  • the NSl protein may either downregulate NSl-BP activity directly by blocking its normal association with spliceosomes. Alternatively, a mechanism can be envisioned, in which the viral NSl protein removes the cellular NSl-BP
  • HSV-1 herpes simplex vims type 1
  • M protein of rhabdovimses plays a key role in viral assembly and ⁇ r budding, however the precise mechanism by which M mediates these processes remains unclear.
  • VSV vesicular stomatitis vims
  • This example demonstrates that a highly conserved PPxY motif at the amino termini of several rhabdoviral M proteins is important for viral budding.
  • the PPxY motifs of both VSV and rabies vims M proteins were shown to interact specifically with WW domains of cellular proteins, including YAP. Mutations that dismpted the viral PPxY motifs of VSV and rabies vims M proteins also dismpted their ability to interact with WW domains.
  • the PPxY motif of VSV M was shown to be important for the release of M protein from cells in a functional budding assay.
  • the M gene of VSV (Indiana serotype) was cloned by RT-PCR using primers flanking the open reading frame and containing an EcoRV(5') and Xbal (3') restriction endonuclease sites.
  • the PCR product was inserted into the EcoRV/Xbal-digested pSP72 vector containing the bacteriophage T7 promoter (Promega) using standard protocols (Ausubel, et al., 1992, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley and Sons, New York). Briefly, total RNA was isolated from BHK-21 cells infected with VSV using the TRIzol reagent and protocol of the manufacturer (Life Technologies).
  • Reverse-transcription was performed using AMV reverse transcriptase (Life Technologies), and PCR was performed using standard protocols with Vent DNA polymerase (New England Biolabs). PCR fragments encoding amino acids 1-74 of VSV M, 1-202, 1-69, and 1-52 of rabies M were inserted into the BamHI and EcoRI restriction sites of the vector pGEX-2TK (Pharmacia) for expression of gst fusion proteins. Oligonucleotide primers and standard PCR protocols were utilized to introduce point mutations within the PPxY motifs of VSV and rabies vims gst-M fusion proteins.
  • Plasmid DNAs were maintained in either E. coli strain DH5alpha (Life Technologies) or strain SURE2 (Stratagene), and DNA was purified using the Qiagen purification system (Qiagen Inc.).
  • the sample was then centrifuged at 75,000 rpm for 2 hours in a TL-100 ultracentrifuge (Beckman).
  • the supernatant fraction (S) was removed and stored at -70° C, while the pellet fraction (P) was suspended in 400 ⁇ l of the above buffer and then stored at -70° C.
  • gst fusion proteins were expressed from the plasmid pGEX-2TK in E. coli SURE2 cells using the gst Gene Fusion System and the protocols of the manufacturer (Pharmacia).
  • the labeling of the fusion proteins with 32 P-gamma ATP (6000Ci/mmol; NEN Dupont) and far-westem blotting were as described previously (Kaelin, et al., 1992, Cell, 70, 351-364, Chen and Sudol, 1995, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 92, 7819-7823).
  • the budding assay was essentially performed as described in Justice, et al., 1995, J. Virol., 69, 3156-3160. Briefly, 35mm dishes of CV-1 cells were infected with VvT7 (generously provided by B. Moss, National Institutes of Health), and then transfected with the appropriate plasmid using the DOTAP reagent (Boehringer Mannheim Corporation). At 2 hours post-transfection the cells were metabolically labeled with 150 ⁇ Ci of 5 SMet-Cys (NEN Dupont), and the cells and media were harvested at various times post-transfection.
  • VSV M protein 9.1.6. INDIRECT IMMUNOFLUORESCENCE Sub-cellular localization of the VSV M protein was accomplished by indirect immunofluorescence. CV-1 cells expressing the M protein of VSV were fixed and permeabilized for 15 minutes in 2.5 formaldehyde/0.5 Triton X-100/PBS. The primary antibody was polyclonal anti-VSV M, while the secondary antibody was affinity purified goat-anti-rabbit conjugated to FITC (Boehringer Mannheim Corporation). Positive cells were visualized with the use of a Leica CLSM confocal microscope.
  • globular domain that mediates protein-protein interactions was identified recently and shown to be present in a wide range of cellular proteins involved in signal transduction, gene regulation, and cytoskeletal formation (Sudol, 1996, In Blundell, et al., (eds.), Prog. Biophys. Molec. Biol, Vol. 65, Elsevier Science Ltd., Great Britain, pp. 113-132).
  • This domain termed WW domain, is about 38-40 amino acids long and contains a number of conserved amino acids including two highly conserved tryptophans spaced 20-22 amino acids apart (Sudol, 1996, In Blundell, et al., (eds.), Prog. Biophys. Molec. Biol, Vol.
  • the WW domain was shown to interact with a polyproline ligand having the core consensus sequence PPxY (Chen, et al., 1997, J. Biol. Chem., 272, 17070-17077; Einbond and Sudol, 1996, FEBS Lett, 384, 1-8).
  • the putative matrix proteins (VP40) of both Ebola and Marburg vimses also contain the PPxY motif at their amino termini (Table III, below; Bukreyev, et al., 1995, Arch. Virol., 140, 1589-1600; Sanchez, et al., 1993, Vims Res., 29, 215-240).
  • the highly conserved nature of the sequence and topology of the PPxY motif within these viral stmctural proteins implies an importance perhaps in the stmcture and/or function of these proteins.
  • the virion preparation was divided into pellet (P) and soluble (S) fractions, and the viral proteins present within each fraction were analyzed by SDS-PAGE and visualized by staining with coomassie brilliant blue (Fig. 24A).
  • the soluble fraction contained predominantly the two viral envelope-associated proteins G (glycoprotein) and M, while the pellet fraction contained the viral nucleocapsid ( ⁇ ) protein in addition to G and M (Fig. 24 A).
  • the full-length M gene of VSV was first cloned by RT-PCR. Several plasmids were then constmcted to express the N-terminal 74 amino acids of VSV M fused to the gst moiety (Fig. 25). The PPxY motif, which begins at amino acid position 24, was unmodified in plasmid gstVSVM74WT (Fig. 25).
  • gstVSVM74P-A and gstVSVM74Y-A proline (P) 24 was changed to alanine (A) and tyrosine (Y) 27 was changed to (A), respectively (Fig. 25).
  • the gstVSVM74WT protein was expressed in E. coli grown under inducing (IN) conditions (Fig. 26A). Equivalent amounts of induced or uninduced bacterial extracts were immobilized onto nitrocellulose filters and probed with gstYAPWW2 (Fig. 26B, lanes 2 and 3), gstYAPWWl (lanes 4 and 5), or gst alone (lanes 6 and 7).
  • the gstVSVM74WT fusion protein interacted with both WW domains 1 and 2 from the mouse YAP, however a reproducibly stronger interaction was observed with WW domain 1 (Fig. 26B, compare lanes 2 and 4). A similar preference for WW domain 1 was also observed when full-length M protein from purified virions and VSV-infected cells extracts were assayed by far- western analysis. The gstVSVM74WT fusion protein did not interact with gst alone (Fig. 26B, lane 6).
  • gstRabM52Y-A is identical to gstRabM52WT except for a single point mutation in the PY motif of the rabies M protein which changes the tyrosine to an alanine (Fig. 28). All four gstRabM fusion proteins were expressed in E. coli grown under inducing conditions and used in far-westem blotting assays (Fig. 29). Duplicate filters containing gstRabM202 and gstRabM69 were probed with either gst alone, or gstYAPWW2 (Fig.
  • gstWW domain fusion proteins were now purified, quantitated, and labeled as probes against a panel of gstWW domain fusion proteins (Fig. 30).
  • equivalent amounts as 5 shown in Fig. 30C
  • gstYAPWWl, gst YAP WW2, gstDystrophinWW, gstNedd4WW2, gstNedd4WW3, and gstFE65WW fusion proteins were probed with either gstRabM52WT (Fig. 30A), or gstRabM52Y-A (Fig. 30B).
  • gstRabM52WT interacted with WW domain 2 and WW domain 1 (upon longer exposure of the filter) of YAP (Fig. 30A).
  • gstRabM52WT also interacted strongly with WW domain 2 from the Nedd4 0 protein (Fig. 30A).
  • the gstRabM52WT protein did not interact with the remaining gstWW domains fusion proteins demonstrating that there is specificity in this protein- protein interaction.
  • the interactions between the rabies M protein and the various WW domains observed were completely abolished by the introduction of a single point mutation in the PPxY motif in the gstRab52MY-A protein (Fig. 30B).
  • CV-1 cells were first infected with the recombinant vaccinia vims (VvT7) expressing the bacteriophage T7 polymerase, and then transfected with plasmid pT7VSVMWT (expressing full-length, wild type M protein), plasmid pT7VSVMY-A (identical to wild type M except for a single point mutation within the PY motif changing tyrosine to alanine), or no DNA (mock-transfected). Both the cells and media were harvested and subjected to immunoprecipitation using polyclonal anti-VSV M antisemm (Fig. 31). Identical amounts of both wild type and mutant VSV M proteins were observed in the cell lysates (Fig.
  • the polyproline ligand that interacts with the WW domain has been identified and well characterized as having the core consensus sequence PPxY. While the M protein of many rhabdovimses maintain the PPxY motif at their amino-termini (Table III), it should be noted that the M proteins from several rhabdovimses offish possess a PPxH (H-histidine)
  • the Nef protein of HIV- 1 for example possesses a polyproline ligand which has been shown to interact with Src-family SH3
  • the LMP2 protein of Epstein-Barr vims contains two polyproline motifs that have been postulated to mediate an interaction between LMP2 and the Src-family tyrosine kinases, FYN and LYN (Longnecker, et al., 1991, J. Virol., 65, 3681-3692).
  • 25 PPxY motif is highly conserved in the gag proteins of many animal and human retrovimses (Wills, et al., 1994, J. Virol., 68, 6605-6618).
  • One of the better characterized gag proteins in terms of functional domains important for gag-mediated budding, is that of Rous sarcoma vims (Bennett, et al., 1991, J. Virol., 65, 272-280; Bennett, et al., 1993, J. Virol., 67, 6487- 6498; Craven, et al., 1993, J. Virol., 67, 6246-6252; Weldon, et al., 1990, J. Virol., 64,
  • RSV gag proteins having mutations in the PPxY motif, or those deleted in this motif are defective in budding. Late budding domains have been identified in gag proteins of human immunodeficiency vims HIV-1 and equine infectious anemia vims, and have been implicated in mediating interactions with host proteins (Gottlinger, et al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA., 88, 3195-3199; Huang, et al., 1995, J.
  • Tyr Xaa Xaa Leu is apparently the "budding motif in the gag p° protein of the equine infectious anemia vims. (Puffer, et al., 1997, J. Virol., 71, 6541-6546).
  • a similar motif in the influenza vims Ml protein is Tyr Xaa Xaa Leu (aa 100-103).
  • the PPxY motif of VSV M protein is not required for membrane localization, but rather appears to be required for a later step in the budding pathway.
  • the PPxY motif of the VSV M protein likely functions as a rhabdoviral late budding domain. 5 Should the PPxY-WW domain interaction prove to be a crucial interaction between the vims and host in vivo, then this vims-host interaction could serve as a potential target for antiviral agents designed to dismpt or block this step of viral assembly and release. Since the WW domain and the core motif of its ligand are relatively short, one could speculate that such antiviral agents could be easily selected from chemical libraries of low
  • VSV (N.J.) KKMGL PPPY DESCP 24-27 34 M14553
  • the sequence is derived from the matrix protein of VSV, rabies, Piry, and S.V. of C. viruses.
  • the sequence is derived from the VP40 protein of Ebola and Marburg viruses.
  • the numbers represent amino acid positions of the PY motif within the protein beginning from the N-terminus.
  • Ebola virus (Zaire strain).
  • the yeast 2-hybrid assay has been used previously to identify the specific domains on the NP that bind to the NPI protein (Wang, et al., 1997, J. Virology 71(3): 1850-1856). Mutational analysis including alanine scanning identified the motifs Ser Xaa Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Xaa Xaa Met (SEQ ID NO:40) and Thr Lys Arg Ser Xaa Xaa Met (SEQ ID NO:41), which are required for binding of NP to NPI-1 and NPI-3, respectively. These sequences were shown to possess nuclear localization signal (NLS) activity. In the present example, MDBK cells were infected at an m.o.i.
  • NP-NLS oligopeptide 1 in the presence or absence of a 19- amino acid NP-NLS oligopeptide (Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22); corresponding to amino acids 2-20 of NP) and an 1 1 -amino acid control peptide (Cys Gly Asp Leu Arg Leu Thr Leu Leu Glu Leu (SEQ ID NO:42)). Hemagglutination titer was measured at 24 hours p.i. At a concentration of 100 ⁇ m, the NP-NLS oligopeptide inhibits viral growth a thousand-fold.
  • the ability of different fragments of the NPI-1 protein to bind the NP-NLS peptide were analyzed.
  • the region of NPI-1 primarily responsible for the binding of NPI-1 to the NP-NLS lies between aa 425-538 at the carboxy terminus of NPI-1, in the region of the STAT-1 binding domain.

Abstract

The present invention relates to the identification of host cell proteins that interact with viral proteins required for virus replication, and high throughput assays to identify compounds that interfere with the specific interaction between the viral and host cell protein. Interfering compounds that inhibit viral replication can be used therapeutically to treat viral infection. The invention is based, in part, on the Applicants' discovery of novel interactions between viral proteins and a human host cell protein. One of these host cell proteins, referred to herein as NPI-1, interacts with influenza virus protein NP. Also, host cell proteins, referred to herein as NS1I-1 and NS1-BP interact with influenza virus protein NS1. In addition, host cell proteins containing WW domains that interact with viral proteins such as Rhabdoviral M protein are described. Compounds that interfere with the binding of the host cell and viral proteins, and inhibit viral replication can be useful for treating viral infection in vivo.

Description

IDENTIFICATION AND USE OF ANTIVIRAL COMPOUNDS
THAT INHIBIT INTERACTION OF HOST CELL PROTEINS
AND VIRAL PROTEINS REQUIRED FOR VIRAL REPLICATION
The work reflected in this application was supported, in part, by a grant from the National Institutes of Health, and the Government may have certain rights in the invention.
The present invention claims priority to U.S. provisional patent application Serial No. 60/148,263, filed on August 11, 19999, the entire contents of which is incorporated herein by reference its entirety.
1. INTRODUCTION The present invention relates to the identification of new cellular targets for viral intervention, the identification of antiviral compounds that act on the new targets, and the therapeutic use of such antiviral compounds.
2. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Replication of viruses can induce drastic changes in the infected host cell metabolism. The analysis of the replication cycle of viruses by molecular biological techniques has facilitated the identification and study of viral gene products that modulate and affect cellular functions (Knipe, 1996, in Fields Virology- 1996. Fields, et al., eds., Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, PA, p. 273-299).
2.1. INFLUENZA A VIRAL GENE PRODUCTS THAT MODULATE HOST CELLULAR FUNCTIONS
Influenza A virus is a negative strand RNA virus belonging to the orthomyxovirus family. The genome of the virus consists of 8 segments and encodes 10 polypeptides. Experimental evidence generated in the laboratory of Scholtissek indicates that the nucleoprotein (NP) is a major determinant of species specificity of influenza viruses (Scholtissek, et al., 1985, Virology 147: 287-294).
2.1.1. NP PROTEIN
Transcription and replication of influenza virus RNA takes place in the nucleus of the infected cell. Transcription and replication of influenza virus RNA requires four virus encoded proteins: the NP and the three components of the viral RNA-dependent RNA polymerase, PBl, PB2 and PA (Huang, et al., 1990, J. Virol. 64: 5669-5673). The NP is the major structural component of the virion that interacts with genomic RNA, and is required for antitermination during RNA synthesis (Beaton & Krug, 1986, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 83:6282-6286). NP is also required for elongation of RNA chains (Shapiro & Krug, 1988, J. Virol. 62: 2285-2290) but not for initiation (Honda, et al., 1988, J. Biochem. 104:
5 1021-1026).
Phylogenetic analysis divides NP genes into two families: one containing NPs predominantly of avian origin, and one containing those of human origin (Bean, 1984, Virology 133: 438-442; Buckler- White & Murphy, 1986, Virology 155: 345-355; Gammelin, et al., 1989, Virology 170: 71-80; Scholtissek, et al., 1985, Virology 147: 287-
10 294). The human virus A/ΗK/1/68 and viruses having genetically related NPs cannot rescue mutants of the avian virus A/FPV/Rostock/1/34 (FPV) with temperature sensitive (ts) defects in the NP following double infection of chicken embryo fibroblasts (CEF) at 40°C (Scholtissek, et al., 1985, Virology 147: 287-294; Scholtissek, et al., 1978, Virology 91 : 79-85). However, the human viruses that failed to rescue the ts mutants on CEF cells
15 were able to do so on Madin-Darby canine kidney (MDCK) cells (Scholtissek, et al., 1978, Virology 91 : 79-85). Additionally, A/HK/1/68 virus and A/FPV/Rostock/1/34 virus reassortants containing the A/HK/1/68 virus-derived NP replicate in MDBK cells (bovine kidney) but not in CEFs (Scholtissek, et al., 1978, Virology 91 : 79-85). The host-specific rescue of FPV ts mutants and the host restriction of A/HK/1/68 virus reassortants suggest 0 that a factor(s) of host origin, which differs between mammalian and avian cells, is responsible for this phenomenon, and that this factor may interact with the influenza A virus NP. However, no host protein(s) that interacts with NP during infection has previously been identified or characterized.
5 2.1.2. NS1 PROTEIN
The NS1 protein of influenza A viruses is known to modulate and affect cellular functions. The NS1 is the only non-structural protein of the virus and is abundantly expressed in infected cells (Lazarowitz, et al., 1971, Virology 46: 830-843).
Several regulatory functions of the NS1 protein have been identified. The NS1 0 protein may influence multiple steps of gene expression including pre-mRNA splicing (Fortes, et al., 1994, EMBO J. 13: 704-712; Lu, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8: 1817-1828), nucleo-cytoplasmic transport of poly(A)-RNA (Fortes, et al., 1994, EMBO J. 13: 704-712; Qiu, Y., et al., 1994, J. Virology 68: 2425-2432) and translation (De La Luna, S., et al., 1995, J. Virol. 69: 2427-2433; Enami, K., et al., 1994, J. Virol. 68: 1423-1427). In 5 addition, NS1 can block the activation of the double-stranded RNA (dsRNA) activated protein kinase (PKR), presumably due to its dsRNA binding activity (Lu, et al., 1995, Virology 214: 222-228). The activation of PKR results in a downregulation of translation and is part of the cellular antiviral defense mechanism. The NSl protein may counteract this cellular response in order to synthesize high levels of viral proteins in the infected cell (Lu,
5 et al., 1995, Virology 214: 222-228). These pleiotropic effects may singly or combined provide the molecular basis for the role that the NSl protein plays in determining the host range and virulence of influenza virus strains (Shimizu, K., et al., 1983, Virology 124: 35- 44; Treanor, J. J., et al., 1989, Virology 171 : 1-9).
Despite these studies examining the activities of NSl and its interactions with
10 various RNAs, little is known about the cellular factors that are recognized by the NS 1 protein and that may therefore be central to NSl functions.
2.2. RHABDOVIRUS GENE PRODUCTS THAT MODULATE HOST CELLULAR FUNCTIONS
15 Viruses belonging to the Rhabdoviridae family cause disease in a wide variety of species including vertebrates, invertebrates, and plants (Wagner & Rose, 1996, In Fields, et al., (eds.), Fields Virology, 3rd edition, Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, pp. 1121 -1135). Two prototypic members of the Rhabdoviridae family include vesicular stomatitis virus (VSV; genus = vesiculovirus) and rabies virus (genus = lyssavirus). Like
20 influenza A virus, rhabdoviruses possess a negative-strand RNA genome. Rhabdoviruses replicate exclusively in the cytoplasm of infected cells, and derive their lipid envelope via budding through the cytoplasmic membrane (for review see Wagner & Rose, 1996, In Fields, et al., (eds.), Fundamental Virology, 3rd edition, Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, pp. 1121-1135 ).
25
2.2.1. MATRIX (M PROTEIN Many aspects of the replication process of rhabdoviruses remain unclear. The major structural protein of rhabdoviruses, the matrix (M) protein, is thought to play a key role in viral assembly and release (Chong & Rose, 1993, J. Virol., 67, 407-414; Chong & Rose,
30 1994, J. Virol., 68, 441-447; Kaptur, et al., 1995, Virology, 206, 894-903; Lenard, 1996, Virology, 216, 289-298; Lyles, et al., 1992, J. Virol., 66, 349-358; McCreedy & Lyles, 1989, Virus Res., 14, 189-205; Mebatsion, et al., 1996, Cell, 84, 941-951; Pal & Wagner, 1987, In, Wagner (ed.), The Rhabdoviruses. Plenum, New York, pp. 75-128; Newcomb, et al., 1982, J. Virol., 41, 1055-1062; Zakowski, et al., 1981, Biochemistry, 20, 3902-3907 ).
35 When the M protein of VSV is expressed in mammalian cells or a baculovirus system in the
j - absence of any other viral protein, M protein is released from the cells in the form of lipid vesicles by budding through the cytoplasmic membrane (Justice, et al., 1995, J. Virol., 69, 3156-3160; Li, et al., 1993, J. Virol., 67, 4415-4420). The N-terminal portion of the VSV M protein has been shown to be important for membrane localization, and thus the budding process (Chong & Rose, 1993, J. Virol., 67, 407-414; Chong and Rose, 1994, J. Virol., 68, 441-447; Lenard and Vanderoef, 1990, J. Virol., 64, 3486-3491; Ye, et al., 1994, J. Virol. 68, 7386-7396; Zakowski and Wagner, 1980, J. Virol., 36, 93-102). The precise mechanism of how M is released from cells and the potential function(s) of host proteins in the budding process remain unclear. The role of the M protein in rhabdoviral assembly has been compared to that of the gag protein in retroviral assembly (Lenard, 1996, Virology, 216, 289-298). The gag protein of Rous sarcoma virus (RSV) and the M protein of VSV share the ability to associate with the cytoplasmic membrane, and to bud from cells independent of other viral proteins (Justice, et al., 1995, J. Virol., 69, 3156-3160; Li, et al., 1993, J. Virol., 67, 4415-4420; Wills, et al., 1994, J. Virol., 68, 6605-6618). In addition to the membrane association (MA) domain of RSV gag, a late (L) budding domain has been identified in the p2b protein of RSV gag and shown to play an essential role in the late stage of budding (Wills, et al., 1994, J. Virol., 68, 6605-6618).
Interestingly, a sequence in the RSV L domain (PPPY) matches the sequence of the consensus motif required for interacting with WW domains of cellular proteins (Chen and Sudol, 1996, Techniques in Protein Chemistry VII, 7, 3-12; Chen, et al., 1997, J. Biol. Chem., 272, 17070-17077; Macias, et al, 1996, Nature, 382, 646-649; Sudol, et al., 1995, J. Biol. Chem., 270, 14733-14741). While L domains have been identified in the gag proteins of other retro viruses, only the gag proteins of the oncoviruses appear to have the PPXY motif conserved (Gottlinger, et al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA., 88, 3195-3199; Huang, et al., 1995, J. Virol., 69, 6810-6818; Parent, et al., 1995, J. Virol., 69, 5455-5460; Puffer, et al., 1997, J. Virol., 71, 6541-6546; Wills, et al., 1994, J. Virol., 68, 6605-6618). The recently described WW domain is (i) a highly structured, modular domain that mediates protein-protein interactions, (ii) present in a wide range of cellular proteins with unrelated functions, and (iii) functionally similar to, but structurally distinct from, Src homology-3 (SH3) domains (for review see Sudol, 1996, In Blundell, et al., (eds.) Prog. Biophys. Mole Biol, Vol. 65, Elsevier Science Ltd., Great Britain, pp. 113-132). The biology of the WW domain and its interacting ligands have been implicated in playing a role in a number of disease states including Liddle's syndrome (a genetic form of hypertension), muscular dystrophy, and Alzheimer's disease (Bork and Sudol, 1994, Trends Biochem. Sci., 19, 531- 533; Einbond and Sudol, 1996, FEBS Lett., 384, 1-8; Staub, et al., 1996, EMBO J., 15, 2371-2380; Sudol, 1996, In Blundell, et al., (eds.) Prog. Biophys. Molec. Biol, Vol. 65, Elsevier Science Ltd., Great Britain, pp. 113-132). In addition, the WW domain has also been implicated in the biology of retroviral budding and assembly (Gamier, et al., 1996, Nature, 381, 744-745; Sudol, 1996, In Blundell, et al., (eds.) Prog. Biophys. Molec. Biol, Vol. 65, Elsevier Science Ltd., Great Britain, pp. 113-132). Indeed, the L domain of RSV gag mentioned above has been shown recently to interact with the WW domain of the cellular Yes-kinase associated protein (YAP) (Gamier, et al., 1996, Nature, 381, 744-745; Sudol, 1994, Oncogene, 9, 2145-2152). Thus, little is known about host cell functions that contribute to the intracellular replication of negative-strand RNA viruses such as influenza and rhabdoviruses. No cellular factors, or interactions between cellular factors and viral proteins, have been previously characterized that can be used as targets for therapeutic intervention.
3. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to the identification of host cell proteins that interact with viral proteins required for virus replication, and high throughput assays to identify compounds that interfere with the specific interaction between the viral and host cell protein. Interfering compounds that inhibit viral replication can be used therapeutically to treat viral infection.
The invention is based, in part, on the Applicants' discovery of novel interactions between viral proteins such as NP and NS 1 influenza proteins, the rhabdovirus M protein, and human host cell proteins or protein domains referred to herein as NPI-1, NPI-2, NPI-3, NPI-4, NPI-5, NPI-6, NSlI-1, NSl-BP, and cellular proteins containing WW domains, respectively. Host cell proteins such as NPI-1 and NSl I-l may be accessory proteins required for replication of the viruses. Compounds that interfere with the binding of viral proteins with host cell proteins or protein domains, and that inhibit viral replication, can be useful for treating viral infection in vivo.
4. DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
FIGS. 1 A and IB: The interactive trap system, as used in the identification of NP- and NSl -interacting proteins. FIG. 1A: R 100 contains the reporter gene Lex Aop-LEU2 and a transcriptionally inactive LexA-NP fusion protein (left). Library proteins are synthesized in R 100 transformants in media containing galactose. If the library protein does not interact with the LexA-NP fusion protein, then the LEU2 gene is not transcribed (middle). If the library protein does interact with the LexA-NP fusion protein, then the LEU2 gene is transcriptionally active, and the cell forms a colony on leu" medium (right). FIG. IB: The pLexA-NP bait plasmid used in the interactive trap. The coding region of influenza A/PR/8/34 virus nucleoprotein (NP) was subcloned into the EcoRI and Sal I
5 restriction sites of pEG202. This construction encodes a fusion protein which includes 202 amino acids of LexA and the entire coding region of NP (498 amino acids) separated by 3 amino acids encoded by polylinker sequences derived from the cloning process. The nucleotide sequence and amino acid sequence depicted correspond to SEQ ID NO:l and SEQ ID NO:2, respectively.
10 FIGS. 2A-2D: Nucleotide sequence of NPI-1 cDNA (SEQ ID NO:3)and the encoded polypeptide sequence (SEQ ID NO:4).
FIG. 3: Comparison of the amino acid sequence of NPI-1 (SEQ ID NO:4) and the amino acid sequence of SRP1 (SEQ ID NO:5). Vertical lines indicate identity; colons and periods indicate conservative changes (Deveraux, et al., 1984, Nucl. Acids Res. 12: 387-
15 395). 42 amino acid ARM repeats are aligned vertically according to Peifer, et al., 1994, Cell 76: 789-791. For a complete comparison of SRP1 to other ARM repeat containing proteins, see Peifer, et al., 1994, Cell 76: 789-791. The ARM consensus sequence is indicated at the bottom; "+" indicates K,R, or H; "-" indicates D or E; "~" indicates a gap. Since other residues are conserved within the repeats of NPI-1 and SRP1, a consensus 0 sequence derived from only these two proteins is also shown.
FIG. 4: GST-NPI-1 binds to NP in vitro. GST (lanes 1, 5, 6) and GST-NPI-1 (lanes 2, 3, 7, 8) were expressed in bacteria and precipitated from cell lysates on glutathione agarose beads. The complexed beads were then incubated with partially purified influenza vims NP and polymerase preparations (Pol/NP) as indicated. Precipitated proteins were 5 fractionated on a 12.5% SDS polyacrylamide gel, and either stained with Coomassie blue (lanes 1 to 3), or immunoblotted using the monoclonal antibody HT103 directed against the viral nucleoprotein (lanes 4 to 8). Unprecipitated Pol/NP was separated in lane 4. M, protein molecular weight markers; *, GST-NPI-1 fusion protein; arrows indicate major fusion protein degradation products. 0 FIG. 5: Immunoblot of total cellular proteins using polyclonal rabbit sera against
NPI-1. Total cell lysates and cytoplasmic cell extracts from HeLa and MDBK cell lines were separated by SDS-PAGE, transferred to nitrocellulose, immunoblotted with anti-NPI-1 sera, and developed by 125I-protein A. Each lane contains protein from 1 x 105 cells. FIG. 6. NP is co-immunoprecipitated from influenza A vims infected cells by 5 antisera against NPI-1. Infected HeLa cell proteins were labeled with 35S-methionine and 35S-cysteine, and total cell lysates were made as described in the text. Complexes of NPI-1 and NP were precipitated using anti-NPI-1 sera. Precipitated proteins were then fractionated by SDS-PAGE and detected by autoradiography.
FIGS. 7-11: Partial DNA sequences of isolated coding regions of five different proteins that interact with the NP of influenza A, as detected using the interactive trap system in yeast. The proteins whose sequences are provided are as follows: FIG. 7: Partial nucleotide sequence of NPI-2 (SEQ ID NO:6). FIGS. 8A-8C: Partial nucleotide sequence of NPI-3 (SEQ ID NO:7) and the amino acid sequence encoded by the partial nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO:8). FIG. 9: Partial nucleotide sequence of NPI-4 (SEQ ID NO:9).
FIG. 10: Partial nucleotide sequence of NPI-5 (SEQ ID NO: 10). FIG. 11 : Partial nucleotide sequence of NPI-6 (SEQ ID NO:l 1). FIGS. 12A-12B: Nucleotide sequence of the NSlI-1 gene (SEQ ID NO:12) and the encoded amino acid sequence of the NSlI-1 protein (SEQ ID NO:13). The sequence of 2572 bp was determined by dideoxy sequencing of two overlapping clones. The first clone, pK5, was isolated from the yeast library and contains the HeLa cell cDNA comprising nucleotide positions 791 to 2572. The second clone, pRACENSlI-1, resulted from the 5'RACE procedure used to obtain cDNA derived from the 5'-end of NSl I-l mRNA, and comprises nucleotide positions 1 to 944. FIG. 13 : Northern blot analysis of HeLa cell poly( A)-RNA using an NS 11- 1 -specific probe.
FIG. 14: Co-precipitation of NSl protein from extracts of A/WSN/33-infected MDCK cells by GST-NS1I-1 and glutathione sepharose. Monolayers of MDCK cells were either infected with influenza A/WSN/33 vims at an m.o.i. of 10 or mock-infected, and labeled with 35S-methionine and cysteine from 5 to 6 hours p.i. Proteins were extracted and used for binding to glutathione sepharose coated with GST-NS1I-1 (lanes 3 and 8) or GST- protein (lane 6). As controls, extracts were immunoprecipitated with cc-NSl (lane 2), α-Ml (lane 4), or non-immune serum (lane 5). Proteins were analyzed by SDS gel electrophoresis and fluorography. Aliquots of the total extracts corresponding to 10 used for the glutathione agarose precipitations are shown (lanes 1 and 7). The positions of vims proteins and molecular weight markers are indicated to the left.
FIG. 15: GST-NS1I-1 co-precipitates NSl proteins of influenza A and B virus strains. Extracts of 35S-labeled MDCK cells infected with the influenza viruses A/duck/Alberta 76 (Panel A), A/turkey/Oregon (Panel B), A/Beijing/32/92 (Panel C), A/Berkeley/1/68 (Panel D), and B/Lee/40 (Panel E) were prepared and used in precipitations of viral proteins by glutathione-sepharose coated with GST-NS1I-1 (lanes "GST-K5") or GST-protein (lanes "GST") as described in Fig. 14. In addition, viral proteins were immunoprecipitated using α-NSl-, α-Ml- or non-immune semm (lanes "α- NS1", "α-Ml", "NI", respectively). Analysis was by SDS gel electrophoresis and fluorography. Aliquots of the total extracts corresponding to 10 (Panels C and E) or 6.7 (Panels A, B, and D), respectively, are also shown (lanes "T"). The positions of viral proteins are indicated to the right.
FIGS. 16A-16B: Nucleotide sequence of NSl-BP cDNA (SEQ ID NO:14) and derived amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 15). The sequence of 2752 nucleotides was determined by sequencing of two overlapping clones. Nucleotides at positions +1038 to + 2215 are derived from the HeLa cDNA-insert of the library plasmid p59-l. The 5'-end of the library cDNA is indicated by an arrow. Nucleotides -537 to +1037 were determined by sequencing cloned HeLa cDNA that was generated by 5'RACE. The open reading frame of 619 amino acids spans positions +1 to +1857. The deduced amino acid sequence is given in single letter codes. The stop codon is marked by an asterisk.
FIG. 17: Northern blot analysis of poly(A)-selected HeLa cell RNA with an NSl - BP-specific probe. 1 μg of HeLa cell poly(A)-RNA was separated by formaldehyde-agarose gel electrophoresis and immobilized on a nylon membrane. A 32P-labeled probe derived from p59-l was used to detect NSl-BP mRNA by hybridization. RNA size markers are indicated to the left.
FIG. 18: Alignment of the five tandem repeat elements of NSl-BP (SEQ ID NOS:16-20). The PILEUP program of the Genetics Computer Group (GCG) was used to align repetitive sequences between amino acids 368 and 607 of NSl-BP. The PRETTY program of GCG was used to determine a consensus sequence (SEQ ID NO:21). Conserved amino acids are shown in capital letters. Invariant positions are indicated by bold letters. FIG. 19: Precipitation of 35S-labeled NSl protein by GST-NS1-BP fusion protein. Radiolabeled NSl protein was synthesized in coupled transcription/translation reactions in the presence of 35S-methionine using pcDNA3-NSl as a template. The NSl protein was precipitated by glutathione Sepharose coated with GST (lane GST) or GST-NS1-BP, which carries amino acids 347 to 619 of NSl-BP (lane GST-NS1-BP). The precipitates were analyzed by SDS polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis and autoradiography. A 10 aliquot of the total reaction was separated in parallel (T). The positions of molecular weight markers are indicated to the left.
FIG. 20: Immunoblot analysis of NSl-BP. Confluent monolayers of Hep-2, 293 and HeLa cells were lysed in RIPA buffer. Soluble proteins from equivalent volumes of extract corresponding to 5 x 104 cells were separated by SDS gel electrophoresis, transferred to nitrocellulose membrane and probed with affinity-purified NSl-BP-specific antibodies. The positions of marker proteins are indicated to the left.
FIG. 21 : Intracellular localization of NSl-BP as determined by indirect immunofluorescence analysis of HeLa cells. Subconfluent HeLa cells were fixed and stained with affinity-purified NS 1 -BP-specific rabbit antibodies followed by visualization using HTC-conjugated secondary antibodies.
FIG. 22: Intracellular distribution of the cellular NSl-BP, the SC35 protein and the viral NSl protein in non-infected or influenza A vims infected HeLa cells. Confocal micrographs show non-infected (A-C) or influenza A/WSN/33 vims-infected HeLa cells at 10 hrs. p.i. (D-F; G-I). The intranuclear localization of NSl-BP was visualized by staining with NSl-BP-specific primary rabbit antibodies and FITC-conjugated secondary antibodies (A, D, G). The cellular SC35 protein (B, H) and the viral NSl protein (E) were labeled by monoclonal mouse antibodies and visualized by Texas Red-conjugated anti-mouse IgG. Micrographs in the third column (C, F and I) show confocal overlays of the FITC- and Texas Red-signals from the fields to the left.
FIGS. 23A and 23B: Pre-mRNA splicing but not spliceosome assembly is inhibited by tmncated NSl-BP. 32P-labeled MINX pre-mRNA was incubated in HeLa cell nuclear extract under splicing-compatible conditions in the absence (lanes NE) or presence of 80 ng/μl affinity-purified GST (lanes GST) or equimolar amounts of affinity purified GST-NSl (lanes GST-NSl) or GST-NSl -BP fusion protein which carries amino acids 347 to 619 of NSl-BP (lanes GST-NSl -BP). (A) RNA analysis. RNA was purified from aliquots of the reactions after a one (lanes 1) or two hour incubation period (lanes 2) and analyzed by electrophoresis on denaturing 13 polyacrylamide-urea gels. The positions of the pre-mRNA, the intron-exon2 and exonl intermediates, and the spliced mRNA and lariat products are indicated to the right. The lower part of the figure shows a longer exposure of the gel. M, 32P-labeled size marker DNA fragments. (B) Splicing complex analysis. Aliquots of the splicing reactions were taken after 20, 40 and 60 minutes and heparin was added to a final concentration of 1 mg/ml. The samples were analyzed by electrophoresis on a native agarose-polyacrylamide gel. The positions of the H-, A- and B-type splicing complexes (Konarska, M. M.„ et al., 1987. Cell 49: 763-774) are indicated on the left.
FIGS. 24 A, 24B and 24C: Far- western analysis of VSV-infected cell extracts and VSV virions. A) Coomassie brilliant blue stain of VSV virion proteins (G=glycoprotein, N=nucleoprotein, and M=matrix protein) present within the pellet (P) and soluble (S) fractions. B) Identical nitrocellulose filters containing 14C-labeled protein standards (MW), mock-infected cell extracts (m), VSV (Ind.)-infected cell extracts (V), and the soluble fraction of purified VSV virions (VR). Filters were probed with either gst alone (left filter), or gstYAPWWl (right filter). Cell extracts were prepared in RIPA buffer with 0.1 SDS. C) A longer exposure of lanes (m) and (V) from the right filter in Fig. IB. FIG. 25 : Diagram of fusion proteins consisting of gst fused to the N-terminal 74 amino acids of VSV (Ind.) M protein. gstVSVM74WT contains a wild type PY motif. gstVSVM74P-A contains a single point mutation resulting in a proline (P) to alanine (A) change. gstVSVM74Y-A contains a single point mutation resulting in a tyrosine (Y) to alanine (A) change. FIGS. 26 A and 26B: Far- western analysis of gstVSVM74WT. A) Coomassie brilliant blue stain of bacterial cell extracts expressing gstVSVM74WT (indicated by the arrow) when grown under inducing (IN) conditions, and not expressing gstVSVM74WT when grown under noninducing (U) conditions. B) Three nitrocellulose filters containing the amount of protein seen in panel A, and probed withgstYAPWW2 (lanes 1, 2, and 3), gstYAPWWl (lanes 4 and 5), and gst alone (lanes 6 and 7). M=14C-labeled protein standards.
FIGS. 27A and 27B: Far-western analysis of wild type and mutant gst-VSVM fusion proteins. A) Coomassie brilliant blue stain of bacterial cell extracts expressing gst alone (lane 2, short arrow), gstVSVM74WT (lane 3), gstVSVM74Y-A (lane 4), and gstVSVM74P-A (lane 5). Lane 1 represents 14C-labeled protein standards (MW). The wild type fusion protein migrates slightly slower than the mutant proteins due to the presence of eight additional amino acids encoded by the polylinker region of this constmct. B) Nitrocellulose filter containing identical amounts of protein as shown in panel A, and probed with gstYAPWW2. The intensity of the signals observed for gstVSVM74Y-A (lane 2) and gstVSVM74P-A (lane 3) is approximately 10 of that observed for gstVSVM74WT (lane 1).
FIG. 28: Diagram of fusion proteins consisting of gst fused to amino acids 1-202 (full-length), 1-69, 1-52 (wild type), or 1-52 (Y-A; tyrosine to alanine mutation) of the rabies vims M protein. The designation of each of the fusion proteins is listed on the left. PPEY is the wild type sequence (E-glutamic acid).
FIGS. 29A, 29B and 29C: Far-western analysis of gst-rabies M fusion proteins. A) Duplicate nitrocellulose filters containing gstRabM69 (Ml -69; lanes 1 and 3) and gstRabM2O2 (M202; lanes 2 and 4) were probed with either gst alone (lanes 1 and 2), or gstYAPWW2 (lanes 3 and 4). B) Coomassie brilliant blue stain of bacterial cell extracts expressing gstRabM52Y-A (Y-A; lane 1) or gstRabM52WT (WT; lane 2) indicated by the arrowhead. C) Identical amounts of gstRabM52Y-A and gstRabM52 WT as seen in panel B were immobilized onto duplicate nitrocellulose filters and probed with either gst alone (lanes 1 and 2), or gstYAPWW2 (lanes 3 and 4).
FIGS. 30A, 30B and 30C: Far-western analysis of gst-rabies M fusion proteins and a panel of gst-WW domain fusion proteins. Identical amounts of gst, gstYAPWWl (YAPl), gstYAPWW2 (YAP2), gstDystrophinWW (DYST.), gstNEDD4WW2 (NEDD2), gstNEDD4WW3 (NEDD3), and gstFE65WW (FE65) were immobilized onto nitrocellulose and probed with either gstRabM52WT (Panel A), or gstRabM52Y-A (Panel B). MW = Relabeled protein standards. C) Coomassie brilliant blue stain of the gst-WW domain fusion proteins that were present on the filters in panels A and B.
FIG. 31 A: VSV M budding assay. Radiolabeled lysates from CV-1 cells receiving no DNA (mock, lane 2), T7VSVMWT DNA (MWT, lane 3), and T7VSVMY-A DNA (MY-A, lane 4) were immunoprecipitated with polyclonal antiserum against the M protein of VSV and fractioned by SDS-PAGE. The position of the M protein of VSV is indicated. MW = 14C-labeled protein standards.
FIG. 3 IB: Radiolabeled proteins released into the media covering cells transfected with no DNA (mock, lane 1), T7VSVMWT DNA (lane 2), and T7VSVMY-A DNA (lane 3) were immunoprecipitated with polyclonal antiserum against the M protein of VSV and fractionated by SDS-PAGE. The relative migration of the M protein of VSV is indicated. FIGS. 32A and 32B: Indirect immunofluorescence and confocal microscopy of transfected CV-1 cells. A) CV-1 cells expressing wild type VSV M protein at 8 hours post- transfection. B) CV-1 cells expressing the VSV M protein containing a tyrosine (Y) to alanine (A) mutation within the PY motif at 8 hours post-transfection. C) untransfected CV- 1 cells. Primary polyclonal antisemm (identical to that used in the experiment shown in Fig. 8) was directed against the M protein of VSV.
5. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates to the identification of host cellular proteins that interact with viral proteins important to viral replication and infection; the identification of compounds that interfere with the specific interaction of the host cell and viral proteins; and the evaluation and use of such compounds as antivirals in the treatment of viral infections in animals, including humans.
The invention is described in this section and in the examples, below, for the identification and inhibition of interactions between human host cell proteins and viral proteins, including influenza vims and rhabdovims proteins. For clarity of discussion, particular detail is provided for the isolation of five particular host cell proteins and/or protein domains. The first such host cell protein is nucleoprotein interactor 1 (NPI-1), a human cell protein that interacts with the influenza vims NP protein. The NPI-1 gene and protein, and the protein's interaction with NP protein are described in detail in the example in Section 6, below. Other host cell proteins that interact with the NP protein include, but are not limited to, NPI-2, NPI-3, NPI-4, NPI-5, and NPI-6, and are also described, below. The interactions between NP and the NPI-1 through NPI-6 host cell proteins provide novel targets for antiviral treatment and serve as excellent models for detailing the aspects of the invention. However, the principles may be analogously applied to the identification of other host cell proteins that interact with any of the four influenza vims proteins (PA, PBl, PB2, in addition to NP) required for viral RNA replication.
Particular detail is also provided in the examples in Sections 7 and 8, below, for the identification of human cell proteins that interact with the influenza vims NSl protein. Section 7 describes the identification of nonstmctural protein 1 interactor 1 (NSl I-l), a human cell protein that interacts with NS 1. Section 8 describes the identification of nonstmctural protein 1 binding protein (NSl-BP), a human cell protein that also interacts with NSl. These interactions provide novel targets for antiviral treatment.
As set forth in the example in Section 9, the present invention also contemplates identifying interactions between rhabdovims proteins and host cell proteins. Section 9 describes the identification of cellular WW-domains as sites of interaction with the rhabdovims matrix (M) protein. In a particular embodiment, the host cell protein is not a cell surface receptor protein.
The present invention further contemplates identifying interactions between host cell proteins and other viral proteins required for infection, including but not limited to, in the case of influenza vims, NEP, HA, NA, M,, and M2 proteins, or, in the case of rhabdovimses, M protein, for example.
The principles may also be analogously applied to other RNA vimses both positive and negative stranded RNA vimses, both single and double stranded, including but not limited to single-stranded, positive-sense RNA vimses such as picomavimses, calicivimses, astrovimses, togavimses, flavivimses, coronavimses, arterivimses, and retrovimses; single- stranded, negative-sense RNA vimses such as paramyxoviruses (including parainfluenza vimses, measles virus, mumps vims, and respiratory syncytial vims), rhabdoviruses, filoviruses, orthomyxoviruses, orthomyxo-like vimses including Dhori insect vims, bunyavimses, and arenavimses; and double-stranded, positive-sense RNA vimses such as reovimses and bimavimses, as well as human immunodeficiency vims (HIV), members of the herpes vims family, and adenovimses. The host cell proteins so identified may include completely novel proteins, or previously described proteins that have not yet been shown to interact with viral proteins.
Any method suitable for detecting protein-protein interactions may be employed for identifying novel viral-host protein interactions, and are considered within the scope of the present invention. For example, some traditional methods are co-immunoprecipitation, crosslinking and copurification through gradients or chromatographic columns. Newer methods result in the simultaneous identification of the genes coding for the protein interacting with a target protein. These methods include probing expression libraries with labeled target protein in a manner similar to antibody probing of λgtl 1 libraries.
One such method that detects protein interactions in vivo, the yeast interactive trap system, was successfully used as described herein to identify the host cell proteins NPI-1 through NPI-6, NSl I-l, and NSl-BP described herein, and is described in detail for illustration only and not by way of limitation. The host cell/viral protein interactions identified are considered targets for antiviral intervention. Assays, such as the ones described herein, can be used to identify compounds that interfere with such interactions. The compounds so identified that inhibit vims infection, replication, assembly, or release can be used as antivirals. In accordance with the invention, a given compound found to inhibit one vims may be tested for antiviral activity against a wide range of different vimses that have analogous dependencies on host cell proteins, including but not limited to single-stranded, positive-sense RNA vimses such as picomavimses, calicivimses, astrovimses, togavimses, flavivimses, coronavimses, arterivimses, and retrovimses; single-stranded negative-sense RNA vimses such as paramyxoviruses (including parainfluenza vimses, measles vims, mumps vims, and respiratory syncytial vims), rhabdovimses, filovimses, orthomyxoviruses, orthomyxo-like vimses including Dhori insect vims, bunyavimses, and arenavimses; and double-stranded, positive-sense RNA vimses such as reovimses and bimavimses, as well as human immunodeficiency vims (HIV), members of the herpes vims family, and adenovimses. Elucidation of the roles of the interacting proteins will lead to identifying other viruses as targets for intervention. For example, as described herein below, NPI-1 is important to the import of viral nucleic acid-protein complex into the nucleus of the host cell. Therefore, methods described below that dismpt this process, through interfering with the activity of NPI-1, for example, may be effective in treating vimses with nuclear phases. Such additional vimses include, but are not limited to, human immunodeficiency vims (HIV), members of the herpes vims family, and adenovimses. The various aspects of the invention are described in the subsections below with specific reference to host cell proteins that interact with the influenza viral proteins NP (host cell proteins NPI-1 through NPI-6) and NSl (host cell proteins NSl I-l and NSl-BP), and rhabdoviral M-protein (host cell proteins containing WW domains), with particular emphasis on host cell protein NPI-1 ; however, the invention is not limited to NPI-1 and encompasses any viral/host cell protein interactions as targets for therapeutic intervention.
5.1. IDENTIFICATION OF HOST CELL PROTEINS THAT INTERACT WITH VIRAL PROTEINS REQUIRED FOR REPLICATION
The gene for the host cell protein NPI-1 was cloned based on its ability to interact with the influenza A vims NP. The NPI-1 is the human homolog of the yeast protein SRP1. Interaction of NPI-1 and NP was demonstrated in yeast by the interactive trap system; in vitro coprecipitation of the NP with a bacterially expressed NPI-1 protein; and in infected cell extracts by coprecipitation of the NP with NPI-1, using anti -NPI-1 sera. The demonstration of this previously unknown interaction is illustrated in the working examples (see Section 6, infra). The data generated indicate that NPI-1 plays a role in the replication of influenza A vimses. NPI-1 is the first cellular protein characterized that interacts with a protein encoded by influenza vimses. This role, therefore, makes the inhibition of the NP- NPI-1 interaction an excellent target for antiviral therapy. It has not yet been demonstrated at what stage in the replication cycle NPI-1 functions. The NPI-1 could affect any of a number of NP functions which may include: (1) movement of the ribonucleoprotein complex (RNP) to the nucleus; (2) vRNA synthesis, including antitermination and elongation; (3) mRNA synthesis, including elongation, polyadenylation, and transport to the cytoplasm; and (4) exit of the RNP from the nucleus during virion assembly.
The fact that both NPI-1 and SRP1 interact with proteins involved in RNA synthesis implies that there may be fundamental similarities between cellular DNA-dependent transcription and influenza viral RNA-dependent RNA synthesis. Cellular factors, like NPI-1, may be shared by the viral and the cellular RNA synthesis machinery to perform similar functions. In addition, the NPI-1 may tether the viral RNP to areas of the nuclear matrix where splicing and polyadenylation of mRNA occur. It should be noted that although NPI-1 was isolated from HeLa cells, this cell line is not productively infected by influenza A vims. However, HeLa cells synthesize influenza viral RNAs and proteins (see Fig. 6, lane 3), and have previously been used to examine viral RNA synthesis (Beaton & Krug, 1986, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 83:6282-6286). The viral NP exists in two forms in the infected cell. One form is associated with ribonucleoprotein complexes (RNP), and the other is a free form (Shapiro & Krug, 1988, J. Virol. 62: 2285-2290). Pol/NP preparations used in coprecipitation experiments with NPI-1 were purified over cesium chloride/glycerol gradients (Honda, et al., 1988, J. Biochem. 104: 1021-1026), which dissociate and purify virion proteins away from vRNA. As shown herein, (FIG. 4, lane 3) the NP but not the polymerase proteins were detected on Coomassie stained gels; however, coprecipitation of the viral polymerase proteins was not rigorously tested by immunoblot experiments. Only the NP was coprecipitated from infected HeLa cell extracts (FIG. 6) suggesting that it is free NP that is bound by NPI-1. Only one host factor has been assigned a definitive function in the replication process of a negative strand RNA virus. The cellular casein kinase II has been shown to phosphorylate the phosphoprotein P of the vesicular stomatitis vims (VSV) RNA-dependent RNA polymerase. This is a step that appears to be required in order to activate the viral polymerase (Barik and Banerjee, 1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89: 6570-6574; Barik and Banerjee, 1992, J. Virol. 66: 1109-1118).
NPI-1 and SRP1 are 50% identical and 81% conserved at the amino acid level. This is a very high degree of conservation between proteins belonging to organisms as distantly related as humans and yeast, and suggests that the NPI-1/SRPl performs a very basic function in the cell. NPI-1 and SRP1 have eight internal repeats, each of approximately 42- amino acids (Fig. 3). This repeat, termed the ARM motif, was originally identified in the Drosophila segment polarity gene armadillo (Riggleman, et al., 1989, Genes Dev. 3: 96- 113), and it has been identified in a number of other proteins including β-catenin, plakoglobin, pl20, APC and smGDS (Peifer, et al., 1994, Cell 76: 789-791, and references therein). Several ARM proteins are associated with cell adhesion stmctures. Armadillo and its homologues bind to the C-terminal cytoplasmic tail of cadherins, a calcium-dependent class of cell adhesion molecules (CAMs), linking the C AMs to the underlying cytoskeleton at cell-cell junctions (McCrea, et al., 1991, Science 254: 1359-1361). In contrast to the armadillo protein, SRP1 and NPI-1 appear to be localized to the nucleus. If NPI-1, like SRP1 (Yano, et al., 1992, Mol. Cell. Biol. 12: 5640-5651), is associated with the nuclear membrane, it is possible that NPI-1 functions to tether viral RNP to the nuclear membranes (Jackson, et al., 1982, Nature 296: 366-368). It should be noted that NPI-1 may be related to (or identical with) a nuclear protein that has been found to be involved in V(D)J recombination (Cuomo, et al., 1994, Meeting abstract F015, Keystone Symposium on Recombination). The carboxyl terminal 265 amino acids of the NPI-1, which were sufficient for interaction with the viral NP, contain four and one-half ARM repeats. Individual repeats, in general, are approximately 30 identical with the ARM consensus sequence. This is consistent with the degree of conservation in ARM repeats of other proteins (Peifer, et al., 1994, Cell 76: 789-791).
Using the same interactive trap system in yeast, five additional DNA sequences, NPI-2, NPI-3, NPI-4, NPI-5, and NPI-6 were isolated that partially encode proteins that interact with the NP of influenza A vims.
Also, using the yeast interactive trap system, DNA sequences encoding the NSl I-l protein and the NSl-BP were identified based on the interaction between these proteins and the NSl protein of influenza A vims. NSl I-l protein is the human homolog of porcine 17β-estradiol dehydrogenase. Several proteins with a dehydrogenase function have recently been shown to be involved in post-transcriptional events of gene expression (Hentze, 1994, Trends Biochem. Sci. 19: 101-103). This supports an important functional role for the NSl I-l interaction during the viral life cycle.
Using oligonucleotide primers and standard PCR protocols to introduce point mutations within selected protein motifs of the rhabdovims M protein, followed by a budding assay, host cellular proteins containing WW domains that interact with viral M protein were identified (see Section 9). The various proteins so identified are listed in Table I.
TABLE I INTERACTING HOST CELL PROTEINS
Host Cell Proteins FIG. # Comments
NPI-1 FIG. 2 Protein sequence, homologous to SRP1 of yeast 10 NPI-2 FIG. 7 Identical to sequences of hnRNP C proteins (Lahiri and Thomas, 1986, Nucl. Acids Res. 14: 4077-4094)
NPI-3 FIG. 8 NPI-4 FIG. 9 NPI-5 FIG. 10
15 NPI-6 FIG. 1 1 NSlI-1 FIG. 12 Protein sequence, homologous to porcine 17β-estradiol dehydrogenase
NSl-BP FIG. 16 WW domains (See Section 8)
20
Note: Subsequent to Applicants' identification of NPI-3, NPI-4, and NPI-5, these sequences were described by other groups and designated Rchl, PC4, and BAT1 , respectively.
The coding sequence for NPI-2 is identical to sequences coding for the previously 25 identified hnRNP C proteins (Lahiri and Thomas, 1986, Nucl. Acids Res. 14: 4077-4094). The NPI-3, NPI-4, NPI-5, and NPI-6 coding sequences were unknown prior to their identification by Applicant. The coding sequences for NSl I-l and NSl-BP are described in detail in the example in Sections 7 and 8, below. The WW domain was previously characterized by Sudol, 1996, In Blundell, et al., (eds.), Prog. Biophys. Molec. Biol, Vol. 30 65, Elsevier Science Ltd., Great Britain, pp. 113-132, as detailed in Section 9, below.
The specific binding domains of the viral and host cell protein binding partners can be used in accordance with the invention as targets for therapeutic intervention or screening assays to identify inhibitory compounds. In addition, peptides corresponding to the binding site of the viral or host cell protein can be used as antiviral inhibitors by dismpting the 35 binding between the binding partners. For example, peptides having amino acid sequences within the viral NP-NLS domain can be used to dis pt the interaction between NP and NPI-1, and thereby inhibit viral replication, as detailed in the Example in Section 10, below. In one embodiment, such an inhibitory peptide comprises a 19 amino-acid sequence of an NP-NLS oligopeptide (Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22); corresponding to amino acids 2-20 of NP). In another embodiment, the protein of the invention comprises amino acids 1-20 of NP. In another embodiment, the protein of the invention comprises a subsequence from 8-18 amino acids in length of the Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22) 19-mer of the NP-NLS oligopeptide. Preferably, the protein of the invention comprises an 8 amino-acid sequence Thr Lys Arg Ser Xaa Xaa Xaa Met (SEQ ID NO:23), which corresponds to the conserved domain of an NP-NLS peptide. The invention contemplates a protein comprising the Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22) 19-mer of the NP-NLS oligopeptide, or an 8-18 amino acid subsequence thereof, in which one or more of the following amino acids substitutions are made at the following positions: Position 2: Ser=>Thr Position 3 : Gln=>Lys Position 8: Ser=»Pro
Position 10 Glu^Gly Position 15 Asp=>Gly
Position 17 Glu=>Asp.
The invention also contemplates a protein of the invention comprising a subsequence of the Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22) 19-mer of the NP-NLS oligopeptide in which position 19 (amino acid Gin) is deleted.
The invention contemplates, in addition to the DNA sequences disclosed herein, 1) any DNA sequence that encodes the same amino acid sequence as encoded by the DNA sequences shown in Figures 2, 7-12 and 16 any DNA sequence that hybridizes to the complement of the coding sequences disclosed herein (see Figs. 2, 7-12, and 16) under highly stringent conditions, e.g., hybridization to filter-bound DNA in 0.5 M NaHPO4, 7% sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), 1 mM EDTA at 65 °C, and washing in O.lxSSC/0.1 SDS at 68°C (Ausubel, F.M., et al., eds., 1989, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. I, Green Publishing Associates, Inc., and John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, at p. 2.10.3) and encodes a functionally equivalent gene product; and/or 3) any DNA sequence that hybridizes to the complement of the coding sequences disclosed herein (see Figs. 2, 7-12, and 16) under less stringent conditions, such as moderately stringent conditions, e.g., washing in 0.2xSSC/0.1 SDS at 42°C (Ausubel, F.M., et al., eds., 1989, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. I, Green Publishing Associates, Inc., and John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, at p. 2.10.3), yet that still encodes a functionally equivalent gene product. The invention also encompasses 1) DNA vectors that contain any of the coding sequences disclosed herein (see Figs. 2, 7-12, and 16), and/or their complements (i.e., antisense); 2) DNA expression vectors that contain any of the coding sequences disclosed herein (see Figs. 2, 7-12, and 16), and/or their complements (i.e., antisense), operatively associated with a regulatory element that directs the expression of the coding and/or antisense sequences; and 3) genetically engineered host cells that contain any of the coding sequences disclosed herein (see Figs. 2, 7-12, and 16), and/or their complements (i.e., antisense), operatively associated with a regulatory element that directs the expression of the coding and/or antisense sequences in the host cell. Regulatory elements include but are not limited to inducible and non-inducible promoters, enhancers, operators and other elements known to those skilled in the art that drive and regulate expression. The invention includes fragments of any of the DNA sequences disclosed herein.
Once the host cell proteins are obtained, they can be used to detect interactions with proteins from other vimses, in accordance with the invention. The following descriptions are provided to illustrate this approach and not by way of limitation. Influenza B vims ribonucleoprotein complex was isolated and using a Western immunoblot assay, it was found that the cellular NPI-1 was associated with this complex. This result indicates that NPI-1, isolated based on its interaction with influenza A vims NP, also interacts with influenza B vims NP. Thus, compounds that inhibit NP-NPI-1 interactions in influenza A vims and thereby inhibit influenza A viral infection should be similarly effective as antivirals against influenza B vims.
Host cell genes that are homologous to those identified herein may be obtained by several methods. In some cases, different host cell proteins that share the property of interacting with the same viral protein, e.g. influenza A vims NP, may also share genetic homology. Thus, the genes identified through the interactive trap selection may be homologous to one another.
Once a host cell gene is identified in accordance with the invention, any homologous gene may be obtained using cloning methods well known to those skilled in the art, including but not limited to the use of appropriate probes to detect the homologous genes within an appropriate cDNA or gDNA (genomic DNA) library. (See, for example, Sambrook, et al., 1989, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratories, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.) This method is especially useful for obtaining proteins that may not share the property of binding to the same viral protein, but may nonetheless be genetically homologous.
Such homologous proteins may interact with proteins of vimses other than the vims used in the interactive trap. For example, a host cell gene whose product was detected through its interaction with an influenza A viral protein may be homologous to another gene whose product does not interact with influenza A vims, but which does interact with influenza B viral protein. To optimize the detection of such a homologous gene, cDNA libraries may be constructed from cells infected with a vims of interest. Besides influenza B vims, this procedure may be applied analogously to other vimses as well, including but not limited to single-stranded, positive-sense RNA vimses such as picomavimses, calicivimses, astrovimses, togavimses, flavivimses, coronavimses, arterivimses, and retrovimses; single-stranded, negative-sense RNA vimses such as paramyxoviruses (including parainfluenza vimses, measles vims, mumps vims, and respiratory syncytial vims), rhabdoviruses, filovimses, orthomyxovimses, orthomyxo-like vimses including Dhori insect vims, bunyavimses, and arenavimses; and double-stranded, positive-sense RNA vimses such as reovimses and bimavimses, as well as human immunodeficiency vims (HIV), members of the herpes vims family, and adenovimses.
5.2. SCREENING ASSAYS FOR COMPOUNDS THAT
INTERFERE WITH THE INTERACTION OF HOST CELL AND VIRAL PROTEINS REQUIRED FOR VIRAL REPLICATION
The host cell protein and the viral protein that interact and bind are sometimes referred to herein as "binding partners". This term also includes peptide fragments, produced as described in the subsections below, comprising the binding domain of each respective protein. Any of a number of assay systems may be utilized to test compounds for their ability to interfere with the interaction of the binding partners. However, rapid high throughput assays for screening large numbers of compounds, including but not limited to ligands (natural or synthetic), peptides, or small organic molecules are preferred. Compounds that are so identified to interfere with the interaction of the binding partners should be further evaluated for antiviral activity in cell based assays, animal model systems and in patients as described herein.
The basic principle of the assay systems used to identify compounds that interfere with the interaction between the viral and host cell proteins involves preparing a reaction mixture containing the viral protein and the host cell protein under conditions and for a time sufficient to allow the two proteins to interact and bind, thus forming a complex. In order to test a compound for inhibitory activity, the reaction is conducted in the presence and absence of the test compound, i.e., the test compound may be initially included in the reaction mixture, or added at a time subsequent to the addition of the viral and host cell protein; controls are incubated without the test compound or with a placebo. The formation of any complexes between the viral protein and the host cell protein is then detected. The formation of a complex in the control reaction, but not in the reaction mixture containing the test compound indicates that the compound interferes with the interaction of the viral protein and host cell protein. The following two descriptions of assay systems used to identify compounds that interfere with the interaction between the viral and host cell proteins are given by way of illustration and not by way of limitation. In a first illustration, NP-NLS oligopeptide consisting of amino acids 2-10 of the NLS peptide was used to inhibit viral growth a thousand-fold in cultured MDBK cells. Thus, peptides that correspond to the NP-NLS target site of binding with NPI-1 can inhibit the interaction of NP with NPI-1 and can be used to treat influenza infection. In a second illustration, NP-NLS was found to bind NPI-1 at a domain of NPI-1 corresponding to amino acids 425-538 of NPI-1. These two illustrations demonstrate that each peptide binding partner (NP, NPI-1, NPI-2) or fragment thereof can be used for screening for compounds that interact with a binding domain and thereby interfere with or dismpt the binding interaction of NP with NPI-1 and/or NPI-3. Each peptide binding partner (NP, NPI-1, NPI-2) or fragment thereof can also be used directly to competitively interfere with or dismpt the binding interaction of NP with NPI-1 and/or NPI-3 and therefore, to treat influenza infection.
In one embodiment, an NP-NLS peptide is used to dismpt the binding interaction of NP with NPI-1 and/or NPI-3. Preferably an amino acid sequence ranging from 8-20 amino acids of the N-terminus of NP is used. Alternatively a 19-mer amino acid sequence (Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22)) corresponding to amino acids 2-20 of the NP protein is used. In one embodiment, the peptide used to dismpt the binding interaction of NP with NPI-1 and/or NPI-1 comprises a 19 amino-acid sequence of an NP-NLS oligopeptide (Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22); corresponding to amino acids 2-20 of NP). In another embodiment, the peptide used to disrupt the binding interaction comprises amino acids 1-20 of NP. In another embodiment, the peptide used to dismpt the binding interaction comprises a subsequence from 8-18 amino acids long of the Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22) 19-mer of the NP-NLS oligopeptide. Preferably, the peptide used to dismpt the binding interaction comprises an 8 amino-acid sequence Thr Lys Arg Ser Xaa Xaa Xaa Met (SEQ ID NO:23), which corresponds to the conserved domain of an NP-NLS peptide. The invention contemplates a peptide that is used to dismpt the binding interaction comprising the Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22) 19-mer of the NP-NLS oligopeptide, or an 8-18 amino acid subsequence thereof, in which one or more of the following amino acids substitutions are made at the following positions:
Position 2: Ser= Thr Position 3: Gln= Lys
Position 8: Ser=>Pro Position 10: Glu=»Gly Position 15: Asp=>Gly Position 17: Glu=»Asp. The invention also contemplates a peptide that is used to dismpt the binding interaction comprising a subsequence of the Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin 19-mer of the NP-NLS oligopeptide in which position 19 (amino acid Gin) is deleted.
The assay components and various formats that may be utilized are described in the subsections below.
5.2.1. ASSAY COMPONENTS
5.2.1.1. PEPTIDES The host cell protein and viral protein binding partners used as components in the assay may be derived from natural sources, e.g., purified from cells and vims, respectively, using protein separation techniques well known in the art; produced by recombinant DNA technology using techniques known in the art (see e.g., Sambrook, et al., 1989, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratories Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.); and/or chemically synthesized in whole or in part using techniques known in the art; e.g., peptides can be synthesized by solid phase techniques, cleaved from the resin and purified by preparative high performance liquid chromatography (see, e.g., Creighton, 1983, Proteins: Structures and Molecular Principles, W.H. Freeman & Co., N.Y., pp. 50-60). The composition of the synthetic peptides may be confirmed by amino acid analysis or sequencing; e.g. , using the Edman degradation procedure (see e.g. , Creighton, 1983, Proteins: Stmctures and Molecular Principles, W.H. Freeman & Co., N.Y., pp. 34- 49).
The peptide fragments should be produced to correspond to the binding domains of the respective proteins. Any number of methods routinely practiced in the art can be used to identify and isolate the protein's binding site. These methods include but are not limited to mutagenesis of one of the genes encoding the protein and screening for dismption of binding in a co-immunoprecipitation assay, or mutagenesis of the host cell gene and selecting for resistance to viral infection. Compensating mutations in the viral gene can be selected that allow for viral growth in this mutant host. Sequence analysis of the genes encoding the respective proteins will reveal the mutations that correspond to the region of the protein involved in interactive binding. Alternatively, one protein can be anchored to a solid surface using methods described in section 5.2.2. infra, and allowed to interact with and bind to its labeled binding partner, which has been treated with a proteolytic enzyme, such as trypsin. After washing, a short, labeled peptide comprising the binding domain may remain associated with the solid material, which can be isolated and identified by amino acid sequencing. Also, once the gene for the protein is obtained, short gene segments can be engineered to express peptide fragments of the protein, which can then be tested for binding activity and purified or synthesized.
Whether produced by molecular cloning methods or by chemical synthetic methods, the amino acid sequence of the binding partners which may be used in the assays of the invention need not be identical to the reported sequence of the genes encoding them. The binding partners may comprise altered sequences in which amino acid residues are deleted, added, or substituted resulting in a functionally equivalent product.
For example, functionally equivalent amino acid residues may be substituted for residues within the sequence resulting in a change of sequence. Such substitutes may be selected from other members of the class to which the amino acid belongs; e.g., the nonpolar (hydrophobic) amino acids include alanine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan, and methionine; the polar neutral amino acids include glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine, tyrosine, asparagine, and glutamine; the positively charged (basic) amino acids include arginine, lysine, and histidine; the negatively charged (acidic) amino acids include aspartic and glutamic acid.
One of the binding partners used in the assay system should be labeled, either directly or indirectly, to facilitate detection of a complex formed between the viral and host cell proteins. Any of a variety of suitable labeling systems may be used including but not limited to radioisotopes such as 1251, 1311, 35S or 3H; enzyme labeling systems that generate a detectable colorimetric signal or light when exposed to substrate such as horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, beta-galactosidase, and luciferase; and fluorescent labels such as umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride and phycoerythrin.
5.2.1.2. LABELING, IMMOBILIZATION AND DETECTION OF PEPTIDES AND PROTEINS
Where recombinant DNA technology is used to produce the viral and host cell binding partners of the assay it may be advantageous to engineer fusion proteins that can facilitate labeling, immobilization and/or detection. For example, the coding sequence of the viral or host cell protein can be fused to that of a heterologous protein that has enzyme activity or serves as an enzyme substrate in order to facilitate labeling and detection. The fusion constructs should be designed so that the heterologous component of the fusion product does not interfere with binding of the host cell and viral protein.
5.2.1.3. LABELING WITH ANTIBODIES
Indirect labeling involves the use of a third protein, such as a labeled antibody, which specifically binds to one of the binding partners, i.e., either the host cell protein or viral protein used. The term "antibody" or "antibodies" as used herein refers to immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen binding site which specifically binds an antigen, such as to one of the binding partners, and does not bind other antigens in a sample. Antibodies include, but are not limited to, monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, multispecific antibodies, human antibodies, humanized antibodies, chimeric antibodies, single chain Fv (scFv), single chain antibodies, anti-idiotypic (anti-Id) antibodies, F(ab) fragments, F(ab')2 fragments, and epitope-binding fragments of any of the above.
The antibodies may be generated by any suitable method known in the art. Polyclonal antibodies to an antigen-of-interest can be produced by various procedures well known in the art. For example, a polypeptide of the invention can be administered to various host animals including, but not limited to, rabbits, mice, rats, etc. to induce the production of sera containing polyclonal antibodies specific for the antigen. Various adjuvants may be used to increase the immunological response, depending on the host species, and include but are not limited to, Freund's (complete and incomplete), mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanins, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful human adjuvants such as BCG (bacille Calmette-Guerin) and corynebacterium parvum. Such adjuvants are also well known in the art.
Monoclonal antibodies can be prepared using a wide variety of techniques known in the art including the use of hybridoma, recombinant, and phage display technologies, or a combination thereof. For example, monoclonal antibodies can be produced using hybridoma techniques including those known in the art and taught, for example, in Harlow et al, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed. 1988); Hammerling, et al, in: Monoclonal Antibodies and T-Cell Hybridomas 563-681 (Elsevier, N.Y., 1981) (said references incorporated by reference in their entireties). The term "monoclonal antibody" as used herein is not limited to antibodies produced through hybridoma technology. The term "monoclonal antibody" refers to an antibody that is derived from a single clone, including any eukaryotic, prokaryotic, or phage clone, and not the method by which it is produced.
Methods for producing and screening for specific antibodies using hybridoma technology are routine and well known in the art. Briefly, mice can be immunized with a polypeptide of the invention or a cell expressing such peptide. Once an immune response is detected, e.g., antibodies specific for the antigen are detected in the mouse semm, the mouse spleen is harvested and splenocytes isolated. The splenocytes are then fused by well known techniques to any suitable myeloma cells, for example cells from cell line SP20 available from the ATCC. Hybridomas are selected and cloned by limited dilution. The hybridoma clones are then assayed by methods known in the art for cells that secrete antibodies capable of binding a polypeptide of the invention. Ascites fluid, which generally contains high levels of antibodies, can be generated by immunizing mice with positive hybridoma clones.
Antibody fragments which recognize specific epitopes may be generated by known techniques. For example, Fab and F(ab')2 fragments of the invention may be produced by proteolytic cleavage of immunoglobulin molecules, using enzymes such as papain (to produce Fab fragments) or pepsin (to produce F(ab')2 fragments). F(ab')2 fragments contain the variable region, the light chain constant region and the CHI domain of the heavy chain. Antibodies may also be generated using various phage display methods known in the art. In phage display methods, functional antibody domains are displayed on the surface of a phage particles which carry the polynucleotide sequences encoding them. In a particular, such phage can be utilized to display antigen binding domains expressed from a repertoire or combinatorial antibody library (e.g., human or murine). Phage expressing an antigen binding domain that binds the antigen of interest can be selected or identified with antigen, e.g., using labeled antigen or antigen bound or captured to a solid surface or bead. Phage used in these methods are typically filamentous phage including fd and Ml 3 binding domains expressed from phage with Fab, Fv or disulfide stabilized Fv antibody domains recombinantly fused to either the phage gene III or gene VIII protein. Examples of phage display methods that can be used to make the antibodies of the present invention include those disclosed in Brinkman et al. , J. Immunol. Methods 182:41 -50 ( 1995); Ames et al, J. Immunol. Methods 184: 177- 186 (1995); Kettleborough et al, Eur. J. Immunol. 24:952-958 (1994); Persic et al, Gene 187 9-18 (1997); Burton et al, Advances in Immunology 57:191-280 (1994); PCT application No. PCT/GB91/01134; PCT publications WO 90/02809; WO 91/10737; WO 92/01047; WO 92/18619; WO 93/11236; WO 95/15982; WO 95/20401; and U.S. Patent Nos. 5,698,426; 5,223,409; 5,403,484; 5,580,717; 5,427,908; 5,750,753; 5,821,047; 5,571,698; 5,427,908; 5,516,637; 5,780,225; 5,658,727; 5,733,743 and 5,969,108; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
Chimeric antibodies can be produced using any technique known to those of skill in the art. See e.g., Morrison, Science 229:1202 (1985); Oi et al, BioTechniques 4:214 (1986); Gillies eto/., (1989)J /mmw«o/. etboώ l25:191-202; U.S. PatentNos.5,807,715; 4,816,567; and 4,816,397, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. A chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions of the antibody are derived from different animal species, such as antibodies having a variable region derived from a murine monoclonal antibody and a human immunoglobulin constant region.
Human antibodies can be produced using any technique known to those of skill in the art. Humanized antibodies are antibody molecules from non-human species antibody that binds the desired antigen having one or more complementarity determining regions (CDRs) from the non-human species and a framework regions from a human immunoglobulin molecule. Often, framework residues in the human framework regions will be substituted with the corresponding residue from the CDR donor antibody to alter, preferably improve, antigen binding. These framework substitutions are identified by methods well known in the art, e.g., by modeling of the interactions of the CDR and framework residues to identify framework residues important for antigen binding and sequence comparison to identify unusual framework residues at particular positions. (See, e.g., Queen et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,585,089; Riechmann et al, Nature 332:323 (1988), which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.) Antibodies can be humanized using a variety of techniques known in the art including, for example, CDR-grafting (EP 239,400; PCT publication WO 91/09967; U.S. Patent Nos. 5,225,539; 5,530,101 ; and 5,585,089), veneering or resurfacing (EP 592,106; EP 519,596; Padlan, Molecular Immunology 2$(4/5):489-498 (1991); Studnickaetα/., Protein Engineering 7(6):805-814 (1994); Roguska. et al, PNAS 91 :969-973 (1994)), and chain shuffling (U.S. Patent No. 5,565,332). Human antibodies can be made by a variety of methods known in the art including phage display methods described above using antibody libraries derived from human immunoglobulin sequences. See also, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,444,887 and 4,716,111 ; and PCT publications WO 98/46645, WO 98/50433, WO 98/24893, WO 98/16654, WO 96/34096, WO 96/33735, and WO 91/10741 ; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
Human antibodies can also be produced using transgenic mice which are incapable of expressing functional endogenous immunoglobulins, but which can express human immunoglobulin genes. For example, the human heavy and light chain immunoglobulin gene complexes may be introduced randomly or by homologous recombination into mouse embryonic stem cells. Alternatively, the human variable region, constant region, and diversity region may be introduced into mouse embryonic stem cells in addition to the human heavy and light chain genes. The mouse heavy and light chain immunoglobulin genes may be rendered non-functional separately or simultaneously with the introduction of human immunoglobulin loci by homologous recombination. In particular, homozygous deletion of the Jpj region prevents endogenous antibody production. The modified embryonic stem cells are expanded and microinjected into blastocysts to produce chimeric mice. The chimeric mice are then be bred to produce homozygous offspring which express human antibodies. The transgenic mice are immunized in the normal fashion with a selected antigen, e.g., all or a portion of a polypeptide of the invention. Monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen can be obtained from the immunized, transgenic mice using conventional hybridoma technology. The human immunoglobulin transgenes harbored by the transgenic mice rearrange during B cell differentiation, and subsequently undergo class switching and somatic mutation. For an overview of this technology for producing human antibodies, see Lonberg and Huszar (1995, Int. Rev. Immunol. 13:65-93). For a detailed discussion of this technology for producing human antibodies and human monoclonal antibodies and protocols for producing such antibodies, see, e.g., PCT publications WO 98/24893; WO 96/34096; WO 96/33735; U.S. Patent Nos. 5,413,923; 5,625,126; 5,633,425; 5,569,825; 5,661,016; 5,545,806; 5,814,318; and 5,939,598, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. In addition, companies such as Abgenix, Inc. (Freemont, CA) and Genpharm (San Jose, CA) can be engaged to provide human antibodies directed against a selected antigen using technology similar to that described above. 5.2.2. ASSAY FORMATS The assay can be conducted in a heterogeneous or homogeneous format. Heterogeneous assays involve anchoring one of the binding partners onto a solid phase and detecting complexes anchored on the solid phase at the end of the reaction. In homogeneous assays, the entire reaction is carried out in a liquid phase. In either approach, the order of addition of reactants can be varied to obtain different information about the compounds being tested. For example, test compounds that interfere with the interaction between the binding partners, e.g., by competition, can be identified by conducting the reaction in the presence of the test substance; i.e., by adding the test substance to the reaction mixture prior to or simultaneously with the viral protein and host cell protein. On the other hand, test compounds that dismpt preformed complexes, e.g. compounds with higher binding constants that displace one of the binding partners from the complex, can be tested by adding the test compound to the reaction mixture after complexes have been formed. The various formats are described briefly below. In a heterogeneous assay system, one binding partner, e.g., either the viral protein or the host cell protein, is anchored onto a solid surface, and its binding partner, which is not anchored, is labeled, either directly or indirectly. In practice, microtiter plates are conveniently utilized. The anchored species may be immobilized by non-covalent or covalent attachments. Non-covalent attachment may be accomplished simply by coating the solid surface with a solution of the protein and drying. Alternatively, an immobilized antibody specific for the protein may be used to anchor the protein to the solid surface. The surfaces may be prepared in advance and stored.
In order to conduct the assay, the binding partner of the immobilized species is added to the coated surface with or without the test compound. After the reaction is complete, unreacted components are removed (e.g., by washing) and any complexes formed will remain immobilized on the solid surface. The detection of complexes anchored on the solid surface can be accomplished in a number of ways. Where the binding partner was pre- labeled, the detection of label immobilized on the surface indicates that complexes were formed. Where the binding partner is not pre-labeled, an indirect label can be used to detect complexes anchored on the surface; e.g. , using a labeled antibody specific for the binding partner (the antibody, in turn, may be directly labeled or indirectly labeled with a labeled anti-Ig antibody). Depending upon the order of addition of reaction components, test compounds that inhibit complex formation or that dismpt preformed complexes can be detected. Alternatively, the reaction can be conducted in a liquid phase in the presence or absence of the test compound, the reaction products separated from unreacted components, and complexes detected; e.g., using an immobilized antibody specific for one binding partner to anchor any complexes formed in solution, and a labeled antibody specific for the other binding partner to detect anchored complexes. Again, depending upon the order of addition of reactants to the liquid phase, test compounds that inhibit complex or which dismpt preformed complexes can be identified.
In an alternate embodiment of the invention, a homogeneous assay can be used. In this approach, a preformed complex of the host cell and viral protein is prepared in which one of the binding partners is labeled, but the signal generated by the label is quenched due to complex formation (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 4,109,496 by Rubenstein which utilizes this approach for immunoassays). The addition of a test substance that competes with and displaces one of the binding partners from the preformed complex will result in the generation of a signal above background. In this way, test substances that dismpt the viral protein-host cell protein interaction can be identified.
For example, in a particular embodiment for NPI-1, NPI-1 can be prepared for immobilization using recombinant DNA techniques described in section 5.2.1., supra. Its coding region can be fused to the glutathione-S-transferase (GST) gene using the fusion vector pGEX-5X-l, in such a manner that its binding activity is maintained in the resulting fusion protein. NP can be purified and used to raise a monoclonal antibody, specific for NP, using methods routinely practiced in the art and described above. This antibody can be labeled with the radioactive isotope 125I, for example, by methods routinely practiced in the art. In a heterogeneous assay, e.g., the GST-NPI-1 fusion protein can be anchored to glutathione-agarose beads. NP can then be added in the presence or absence of the test compound in a manner that allows NP to interact with and bind to the NPI-1 portion of the fusion protein. After the test compound is added, unbound material can be washed away, and the NP-specific labeled monoclonal antibody can be added to the system and allowed to bind to the complexed binding partners. The interaction between NP and NPI-1 can be detected by measuring the amount of radioactivity that remains associated with the glutathione-agarose beads. A successful inhibition of the interaction by the test compound will result in a decrease in measured radioactivity.
Alternatively, the viral binding partner, such as NS 1 , can be prepared for immobilization using recombinant DNA techniques described in section 5.2.1., supra. The NSl coding region can be fused to the glutathione-S-transferase (GST) gene using a fusion vector such as pGEX-5X-l , in such a manner that its binding activity is maintained in the resulting fusion protein. A corresponding host cell binding partner, such as NSl-BP can be purified and used to raise an NSl-BP-specific monoclonal antibody which can be labeled with a radioactive isotope, using methods described below in section 5.2.1.3. In a heterogeneous assay, e.g., the GST-NSl fusion protein can be anchored to glutathione- agarose beads. NSl-BP can then be added in the presence or absence of the test compound in a manner that allows NSl-BP to interact with and bind to the NSl portion of the fusion protein. After the test compound is added, unbound material can be washed away, and the NSl -specific labeled monoclonal antibody can be added to the system and allowed to bind to the complexed binding partners. The interaction between NSl and NSl-BP can be detected by measuring the amount of radioactivity that remains associated with the glutathione-agarose beads. A successful inhibition of the interaction by the test compound will result in a decrease in measured radioactivity.
In another particular embodiment, for NSl-BP, for example, a GST-NSl -BP fusion protein and NSl (or conversely, a GST-NSl fusion protein and NSl-BP) can be mixed together in liquid in the absence of the solid glutathione-agarose beads. The test compound can be added either during or after the binding partners are allowed to interact. This mixture can then be added to the glutathione-agarose beads and unbound material is washed away. Again the extent of inhibition of the binding partner interaction can be detected by measuring the radioactivity associated with the beads. In another embodiment of the invention, these same techniques can be employed using peptide fragments that correspond to the binding domains of the viral and host cell proteins, respectively, in place of one or both of the full length proteins. These binding domains can be identified, as described in section 5.2.1., supra. For example, and not by way of limitation, NSl-BP can be anchored to a solid material as described above in this section by making a GST-NS 1 -BP fusion protein and allowing it to bind to glutathione agarose beads. NSl can be labeled with a radioactive isotope, such as 35S, and cleaved with a proteolytic enzyme such as trypsin. Cleavage products can then be added to the anchored GST-NS 1-BP fusion protein and allowed to bind. After washing away unbound peptides, labeled bound material, representing the NS 1 binding domain, can be eluted, purified, and analyzed for amino acid sequence by methods described in section 5.2.1., supra. Peptides so identified can be produced synthetically or fused to appropriate facilitative proteins using recombinant DNA technology, as described in section 5.2.1., supra.
In accordance with the invention, a given compound found to inhibit one virus may be tested for general antiviral activity against a wide range of different viruses that have analogous dependencies on host cell proteins. For example, and not by way of limitation, a compound that inhibits the interaction of influenza vims NSl with NSl-BP by binding to the NSl binding site can be tested, according to the assays described in section 5.3. infra, against other vimses, particularly those that have similar proteins, e.g., parainfluenza vimses.
5.3. ASSAYS FOR ANTIVIRAL ACTIVITY Any of the inhibitory compounds that are identified in the foregoing assay systems may be tested for antiviral activity.
5.3.1. VIRAL GROWTH ASSAYS
The ability of an inhibitor identified in the foregoing assay systems to prevent viral growth can be assayed by plaque formation or by other indices of viral growth, such as the TCID50 or growth in the allantois of the chick embryo. In these assays, an appropriate cell line or embryonated eggs are infected with wild-type influenza vims, and the test compound is added to the tissue culture medium either at or after the time of infection. The effect of the test compound is scored by quantitation of viral particle formation as indicated by hemagglutinin (HA) titers measured in the supernatants of infected cells or in the allantoic fluids of infected embryonated eggs; by the presence of viral plaques; or, in cases where a plaque phenotype is not present, by an index such as the TCID50 or growth in the allantois of the chick embryo, or with a hemagglutination assay.
An inhibitor can be scored by the ability of a test compound to depress the HA titer or plaque formation, or to reduce the cytopathic effect in vims-infected cells or the allantois of the chick embryo, or by its ability to reduce viral particle formation as measured in a hemagglutination assay. An inhibitor can also be scored by the ability of a test compound to decrease the amount of a viral protein, e.g., rhabdovims M protein, released from cells in a functional budding assay, such as the one described in Justice, et al., 1995 (J. Virol., 69, 3156-3160) and used in the experiments described in the example in section 9.1.5 infra).
5.3.2. ANIMAL MODEL ASSAYS
The ability of an inhibitor to prevent replication of vimses such as picomavimses, calicivimses, astrovimses, togavimses, flavivimses, coronavimses, arterivimses, retrovimses, paramyxoviruses (including parainfluenza vimses, measles vims, mumps virus, and respiratory syncytial vims), rhabdoviruses, filovimses, orthomyxovimses, orthomyxo-like vimses including Dhori insect virus, bunyavimses, and arenaviruses; and double-stranded, positive-sense RNA viruses such as reovimses and bimavimses, as well as human immunodeficiency vims (HIV), members of the herpes vims family, and adenovimses, can be assayed in animal models that are natural or adapted hosts or transgenic hosts for the vims. Such animals may include mammals such as pigs, ferrets, mice, monkeys, horses, and primates, or birds. As described in detail in Section 5.5 infra, such animal models can be used to determine the LD50 and the ED50 in animal subjects, and such data can be used to derive the therapeutic index for the inhibitor of the viral/host cell protein interaction.
5.4. INHIBITORY COMPOUNDS
Inhibitory compounds identified in the foregoing screening assays which may be used in accordance with the invention may include but are not limited to, polypeptides, peptides, peptidomimetics, antibodies, nucleic acids (e.g., RNA and DNA), and small organic or inorganic molecules and other dmgs. Preferably, the inhibitory compounds have a molecular weight of less than 2000
Daltons, more preferably less than 1500 Daltons, even more preferably less than 1000 Daltons, and most preferably, less than 700 Daltons.
Peptides having an amino acid sequence corresponding to the domain of the host cell protein that binds to the viral protein may be used to compete with the native viral protein and, therefore, may be useful as inhibitors in accordance with the invention. Similarly, peptides having an amino acid sequence corresponding to the domain of the viral protein that binds to the host cell protein may be used. Such peptides may be synthesized chemically or produced via recombinant DNA technology using methods well known in the art (e.g., Creighton, 1983, Proteins: Stmctures and Molecular Principles, W.H. Freeman & Co., N.Y., pp. 34-49; Sambrook, et al., 1989, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratories Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.). If desired, nonclassical amino acids or chemical amino acid analogs can be introduced as a substitution or addition into such a peptide. Non-classical amino acids include but are not limited to the D-isomers of the common amino acids, α-amino isobutyric acid, 4-aminobutyric acid, hydroxyproline, sarcosine, citrulline, cysteic acid, t-butylglycine, t-butylalanine, phenylglycine, cyclohexylalanine, β-alanine, designer amino acids such as β-methyl amino acids, Cα- methyl amino acids, and Nα-methyl amino acids. Further, peptides can be chemically modified by any chemical modification techniques known to those of skill in the art, including but not limited to specific chemical cleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8 protease, NaBH4; acetylation, formylation, oxidation, reduction; metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin; etc. The peptides may be isolated and purified by standard methods including chromatography (e.g., ion exchange, affinity, and sizing column chromatography), centrifugation, differential solubility, or by any other standard technique for the purification of peptides. Lipofectin or liposomes may be used to 5 deliver the peptides to cells.
Alternatively, antibodies that are both specific for the binding domains of either the host cell or viral proteins and interfere with their interaction may be used. Such antibodies may be generated using standard techniques described in Section 5.2.1., supra, against the
10 proteins themselves or against peptides corresponding to the binding domains of the proteins. Such antibodies include but are not limited to polyclonal, monoclonal, Fab fragments, single chain antibodies, chimeric antibodies, etc. Where whole antibodies are used, internalizing antibodies are preferred. However, lipofectin may be used to deliver the antibody or a fragment of the Fab region which binds to the viral or host cell protein epitope
15 into cells. Where fragments of the antibody are used, the smallest inhibitory fragment that binds to the target protein's binding domain is preferred.
5.5. PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS AND METHODS OF ADMINISTRATION . The identified compounds that inhibit viral replication can be administered to an animal, preferably a mammal and most preferably a human at therapeutically effective doses to treat, prevent or inhibit viral infection. A therapeutically effective dose is the amount of a compound sufficient to inhibit or reduce viral replication, the amount compound sufficient to induce or enhance an immune response to the virus, or the amount of a compound r. c sufficient to result in amelioration of symptoms of viral infection. In a preferred aspect, the compound administered to treat, prevent or inhibit viral infection is substantially purified (e.g., substantially free from substances that limit its effect or produce undesired side-effects).
Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard
™ pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50 of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50 of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50. Compounds that exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. While compounds that exhibit toxic side
, , effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such compounds to the site of infection in order to minimize damage to uninfected cells and reduce side effects.
The data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans. The dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. For any compound used in the method of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e. , the concentration of the test compound that achieves a half-maximal infection, or a half-maximal inhibition) as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography. Suitable doses for antibodies range from 0.1 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg of body weight (generally 10 mg/kg to 20 mg/kg), and suitable doses for peptides or polypeptide range from about 0.001 to 30 mg/kg body weight.
Various delivery systems are known and can be used to administer a compound, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules, recombinant cells capable of expressing the compound, receptor-mediated endocytosis (see, e.g., Wu and Wu, 1987, J Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432), constmction of a nucleic acid as part of a retroviral or other vector, etc. Methods of introduction include but are not limited to intratumoral, intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, epidural, and oral routes. The compounds may be administered by any convenient route, for example by infusion or bolus injection, by absorption through epithelial or mucocutaneous linings (e.g., oral mucosa, rectal and intestinal mucosa, etc.) and may be administered together with other biologically active agents. Administration can be systemic or local. In addition, it may be desirable to introduce the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention into the central nervous system by any suitable route, including intraventricular and intrathecal injection; intraventricular injection may be facilitated by an intraventricular catheter, for example, attached to a reservoir, such as an Ommaya reservoir.
For administration by inhalation, the compounds for use according to the present invention are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebuliser, with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas. In the case of a pressurized aerosol the dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount. Capsules and cartridges of e.g. gelatin for use in an inhaler or insufflator may be formulated containing a powder mix of the compound and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.
In a specific embodiment, the compound can be delivered in a vesicle, in particular a liposome (see Langer, Science 249: 1527-1533 (1990); Treat et al., in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 353-365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 317-327; see generally ibid.)
In a specific embodiment, the compound can be delivered in a controlled release system. In one embodiment, a pump may be used (see Langer, supra; Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref. Biomed. Eng 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et al, Surgery 88:507 (1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl J. Med. 321 :574 (1989)). In another embodiment, polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Florida (1974); Controlled Dmg Bioavailability, Dmg Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J. Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol Chem. 23:61 (1983); see also Levy et al., Science 228:190 (1985); During et al., Ann. Neurol 25:351 (1989); Howard et al., J. Neurosurg. 71 :105 (1989)). In yet another embodiment, a controlled release system can be placed in proximity of the therapeutic target, i.e., the brain, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115- 138 (1984)).
Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (Science 249:1527-1533 (1990)).
In a specific embodiment where the compound is a nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide or peptide, the nucleic acid can be administered in vivo to promote expression of its encoded peptide or polypeptide, by constmcting it as part of an appropriate nucleic acid expression vector and administering it so that it becomes intracellular, e.g., by use of a retroviral vector (see U.S. Patent No. 4,980,286), or by direct injection, or by use of microparticle bombardment (e.g., a gene gun; Biolistic, Dupont), or coating with lipids or cell-surface receptors or transfecting agents, or by administering it in linkage to a homeobox-like peptide which is known to enter the nucleus (see e.g., Joliot et al., 1991, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 88:1864-1868), etc. Alternatively, a nucleic acid can be introduced intracellularly and incorporated within host cell DNA for expression, by homologous recombination.
The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions. Such compositions comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In a specific embodiment, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable" means approved by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals, and more particularly in humans. The term "carrier" refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient, or vehicle with which the therapeutic is administered. Such pharmaceutical carriers can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. Water is a preferred carrier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions. Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like. The composition, if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents. These compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like. The composition can be formulated as a suppository, with traditional binders and carriers such as triglycerides. Examples of suitable pharmaceutical carriers are described in "Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences" by E.W. Martin. Such compositions will contain a therapeutically effective amount of the compound, preferably in purified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient. The formulation should suit the mode of administration.
In a preferred embodiment, the composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous administration to human beings. Typically, compositions for intravenous administration are solutions in sterile isotonic aqueous buffer. Where necessary, the composition may also include a solubilizing agent and a local anesthetic such as lignocaine to ease pain at the site of the injection. Generally, the ingredients are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent. Where the composition is to be administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline. Where the composition is administered by injection, an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration. For oral administration, the pharmaceutical compositions may take the form of, for example, tablets or capsules prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients such as binding agents (e.g., pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose); fillers (e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogen phosphate); lubricants (e.g. , magnesium stearate, talc or silica); disintegrants (e.g., potato starch or sodium starch glycollate); or wetting agents (e.g. , sodium lauryl sulphate). The tablets may be coated by methods well known in the art. Liquid preparations for oral administration may take the form of, for example, solutions, syrups or suspensions, or they may be presented as a dry product for constitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use. Such liquid preparations may be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents (e.g., sorbitol syrup, cellulose derivatives or hydrogenated edible fats); emulsifying agents (e.g., lecithin or acacia); non-aqueous vehicles (e.g., almond oil, oily esters, ethyl alcohol or fractionated vegetable oils); and preservatives (e.g., methyl or propyl-p-hydroxybenzoates or sorbic acid). The preparations may also contain buffer salts, flavoring, coloring and sweetening agents as appropriate.
The compounds can be formulated as neutral or salt forms. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those formed with free amino groups such as those derived from hydrochloric, phosphoric, acetic, oxalic, tartaric acids, etc., and those formed with free carboxyl groups such as those derived from sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, ferric hydroxides, isopropylamine, triethylamine, 2-ethylamino ethanol, histidine, procaine, etc.
Suppositories generally contain active ingredient in the range of 0.5% to 10% by weight; oral formulations preferably contain 10% to 95% active ingredient.
The invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention. Optionally associated with such container(s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale of pharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflects approval by the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration.
5.5.1. INTRACELLULAR DELIVERY OF PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS The identified compounds that inhibit viral replication may be administered intracellularly to a patient at therapeutically effective doses to treat viral infection. In one embodiment, an oligopeptide of the invention is targeted directly to the cytoplasm and/or nucleus of a cell. In a specific embodiment, the targeting system employed is a penetratin or "trojan peptide" targeting system (Derossi, et al., 1998, Trends Cell Biol. 8:84-87).
The trojan peptide targeting system employs a fusion protein created using standard methods of recombinant polypeptide technology. The fusion protein comprises an oligopeptide sequence to be internalized fused to a trojan peptide intemalization vector, e.g., penetratin- 1 or Antennapedia homeodomain (Antp-HD). The oligopeptide "cargo" and the trojan peptide vector may be coupled by several methods including, but not limited to, 1) chemical synthesis and coupling in which the cargo and the trojan vector are synthesized separately and attached through a disulfide bond; 2) chemical synthesis in tandem in which a peptidic cargo is synthesized in tandem with a trojan vector; and 3) an in vitro recombination approach in which fusion peptides comprising the third helix of Antp-HD, a tag (e.g., myc) and a cargo are expressed in E. coli and purified (Derossi, et al., 1998, Trends Cell Biol. 8:84-87).
The trojan peptide targeting system may be used to target intemalization of fusion proteins of at least 100 amino acids, and possibly longer, depending on the stmcture of the cargo. Preferably, the fusion proteins are preincubated with small amounts of SDS or polysialic acid to mask positive charges and prevent peptide degradation. Such treatment blocks instantaneous intemalization, and allows slow diffusion and progressive release when the fusion protein is administered in the peritoneal cavity (Derossi, et al., 1998, Trends Cell Biol. 8:84-87).
6. EXAMPLE: THE IDENTIFICATION OF NPI-1 AND ITS INTERACTION
WITH INFLUENZA NUCLEOPROTEIN
The yeast interactive trap system was used to identify a cellular protein which interacts with the nucleoprotein of influenza A vimses. This protein, nucleoprotein interactor 1 (NPI-1) is the human homologue of the yeast protein SRP1. SRP1 was previously identified as a suppressor of temperature-sensitive RNA polymerase I mutations (Yano, et. al., 1992, Mol. Cell. Biol. 12:5640-5651). A full length cDNA clone of NPI-1 was generated from HeLa cell poly A+ RNA. The viral NP, which had been partially purified from influenza A/PR/8/34 vims-infected embryonated eggs, could be coprecipitated from solution by glutathione agarose beads complexed with a bacterially expressed glutathione-S-transferase (GST)-NPI-l fusion protein, confirming the results of the yeast genetic system. Antisera raised against NPI-1 identified a 65 kDa polypeptide from total cellular extracts of both HeLa and MDBK cells. In addition, the viral nucleoprotein was co- immunoprecipitated from influenza A/WSN/33 vims-infected HeLa cells by antisera directed against NPI-1, demonstrating an interaction of these two proteins in infected cells, and suggesting that NPI-1 plays a role during influenza vims replication.
6.1. MATERIALS AND METHODS
6.1.1. YEAST. BACTERIA AND PLASMIDS Yeast strain EGY48 (Mata trpl uraS his3 LEU2::pLEXAop6-LEU2) (Zervos, et al., 1993, Cell 72: 222-232) and plasmids pEG202, pSH18-34, and pRFHMl and the HeLa cell cDNA library constructed in pJG4-5 (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803) were previously described. Similar versions of these plasmids and this yeast host strain are available commercially from Clontech as part of a two fusion protein system. pLexA-NP was constmcted by subcloning the cDNA of influenza A/PR/8/34 NP as a LexA translational fusion gene into pEG202 (Fig. 1). Yeast strains constmcted as part of these studies are described in Table 2. Escherichia coli MH3 (trpC araD lacXhsdR galU galK) and W31005 were previously described (Hall, et al., 1984, Cell 36: 1057-1065).
6.1.2. SELECTION OF NP INTERACTORS An interactive trap selection was performed essentially as has been previously described (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803; Zervos, et al., 1993, Cell 72: 222-232). Strain RI 00 was transformed by the HeLa cDNA library using the lithium acetate method (Ito, et al., 1983, J. Bacteriol. 153: 163-168). 2 x 106 primary yeast transformants were selected on twelve 25 x 25 cm2 his'trp'-glucose plates, pooled and stored at -70°C. Library transformants were selected for leu+ phenotype on his'leu'-galactose plates; the efficiency of plating was approximately 10"4 leu+ colonies per galactose+ colony. Plasmid DNA was isolated from leu+ library transformants as described by Hoffman and Winston (Hoffman & Winston, 1987, Gene 57: 267-272) and introduced into MH3 cells by electroporation. Library plasmids were selected by plating the transformation mix on lxA+amp+glucose plates (Miller, 1972, Experiments in Molecular Genetics, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY). cDNAs were analyzed by checking the specificity of interaction with the NP. Each isolated plasmid was introduced into strains R101 and R102. These strains harbor pSH18- 34, a reporter plasmid encoding β-galactosidase with a GAL1 promoter transcriptionally controlled from upstream LexA binding sites. Strain R102 was used as a negative control for NP-specificity of cloned cDNAs. It contains pRFHMl , which encodes LexA fused to a transcriptionally inert fragment of the Drosophila melanogaster bicoid protein. β-Galactosidase activity was assayed on nitrocellulose replicas of the colonies by freeze fracturing the cells and incubating in buffer containing 5-bromo-4-chloro-3-indolyl-β-D- galactoside (X-gal) (Miller, 1972, Experiments in Molecular Genetics, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY). Plasmids which conferred both a leu+ and β- gal+ phenotypes in the presence of pLexA-NP but not in the presence of pRFHMl were saved for further study.
6.1.3. CLONING OF THE 5' TERMINUS OF NPI-1 The 5' terminus of NPI-1 was cloned by rapid amplification of cDNA ends ("RACE") by the method of Frohman (Frohman, 1990, in PCR Protocols: A Guide to Methods and Applications, Innis, et. al., eds., Academic Press Inc., San Diego, p. 28-38; Frohman, et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85: 8998-9002). Reverse transcription of 1 μg of poly A+ HeLa cell RNA was performed using the NPI-1 specific oligonucleotide 5'GCAAAGCAGGAGAAACCAC3' (SEQ ID NO:24). First strand cDNA was tailed with dCTP by terminal transferase. PCR amplification of the reverse transcription product was performed with the nested NPI-1 primer 5'GGGTCCATCTGATAGATATGAGAG3' (SEQ ID NO:25) and the 5' RACE anchor primer
5'CUACUACUACUAGGCCACGCGTCGACTACTACGGGIIGGGIIGGGIIG3' (SEQ ID NO:26; Gibco/BRL). The PCR product was subcloned into pGEM-T (Promega) and was sequenced by standard protocols. 5'RACE products from three independent experiments were cloned and sequenced in order to avoid errors introduced by PCR.
6.1.4. BACTERIAL EXPRESSION AND PURIFICATION OF GST-NPI-1 The NPI-1 cDNA derived from a HeLa cDNA library was subcloned into the EcoRI and Xhol restriction endonuclease sites of the glutathione-S-transferase fusion vector pGEX-5X-l (Pharmacia) to generate the plasmid pGST-NPI-1. Protein was induced from bacterial expression plasmids in W31005 cells with isopropyl-β-D-galactopyranoside according to standard protocols (Smith & Johnson, 1988, Gene 67: 31-40). Bacteria were pelleted 4 h after induction, washed in ice cold phosphate buffered saline (PBS), and resuspended in one-tenth culture volume PBS+1 Triton X-100. Bacteria were lysed on ice with four 15 s pulses in a Raytheon sonicator at an output setting of 1 amp. Insoluble material was pelleted at 50,000xg for 30 min in a Beckman TL-100.3 rotor.
GST-NPI-1 and GST were purified from bacterial lysates on glutathione-agarose beads (Sigma Chemical Corporation.). Beads were swelled according to the manufacturer's instmctions and equilibrated in PBS. Typical binding reactions were done in 500 μl of PBS/0.1 Triton X-100, and included 50 μl bacterial lysate and 10 μl of a 50 slurry of glutathione-agarose beads. Binding reactions were incubated for 5 min at room temperature on a rotating wheel. Beads were collected by centrifugation for 5 s in a microfuge, and were washed three times in PBS.
6.1.5. NP BINDING ASSAY To assay binding of NP to GST-NPI-1 /bead complexes typical reactions were performed in 500 μl of ice cold PBS+0.05 Nonidet P-40 and contained washed GST-NP1- 1/bead complexes and 10 μg partially purified influenza vims polymerase and nucleoprotein preparations (Pol/NP). Vims was prepared from embryonated eggs infected by influenza A/PR/8/34 vims and POL/NP preparations were purified as previously described (Enami, et al., 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87: 3802-3805; Parvin, et al., 1989, J. Virol. 63: 5142-5152). NP was bound for 1 h at 4°C on a rotating wheel. Beads were collected by centrifugation for 5 s in a microfuge, and were washed three times in PBS+0.05 NP-40. Washed beads were resuspended in 50 μl SDS sample buffer (Sambrook, et al., 1989, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratories Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY), boiled for 5 min, and pelleted in a microfuge. 10 μl of each supernatant was separated by electrophoresis on a 12.5 SDS-polyacrylamide gel. Gels were either stained with Coomassie blue or processed for immunoblot analysis. NP was detected by immunoblotting with the monoclonal antibody HT103.
6.1.6. ANTISERA AND IMMUNOBLOTTING Polyclonal rabbit antisera against NPI-1 was generated by immunization of a female NZY Rabbit (Buckshire Farms) with 200 μg of purified GST-NPI-1 in complete Freund's adjuvant, followed by two boosts of 100 μg in incomplete Freund's adjuvant at three week intervals. The specificity of antisera was demonstrated by immunoblot analysis of GST- NPI-1 in bacterial lysates. Immunoblots were performed by standard methods (Harlow and Lane, 1988, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratories Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY). Sera were used at a dilution of 1 :1000.
6.1.7. VIRUSES AND CELLS Total cell lysates from HeLa and MDBK cells were generated by direct lysing of cells in SDS-sample buffer, followed by shearing of chromosomal DNA by passage through a 21 ga. syringe. Cytoplasmic extracts were generated by lysing cells in ice cold NP-40 lysis buffer (10 mM Tris-CI, pH 8.0; 100 mM NaCI; 1 mM EDTA; 1 mM DTT; 1 Nonidet P-40; 1 mM 4-(2-aminoethyl)benzenesulfonylfluoride-hydrochloride (Pefabloc)). After 10 min on ice nuclei were removed by centrifugation. Proteins were separated by SDS-PAGE, transferred to nitrocellulose and visualized by immunoblotting.
To generate infected cell lysates containing metabolically labeled proteins 4xl06 HeLa cells were infected with influenza A/WSN/33 vims at a multiplicity of 10 for 45 min at 37°C. Infection was allowed to proceed in DMEM + 0.1 BSA for 5 h at which time cells were labeled with 50 μCi 35S-methionine + 50 μCi 35S-cystine in MEM-cys-met for 1 h. Extracts were prepared by resuspending infected cells in 650 μl ice cold NP-40 lysis buffer followed by two 15 s pulses in a Raytheon sonicator to dismpt nuclei. Insoluble cell debris was removed by centrifugation at 100,000xg in a TL- 100.3 Beckman rotor. 5 μl anti-NPI-1 sera was incubated on ice for 1 h with 100 μl infected cell lysates. Immune complexes were precipitated from solution by incubation with Sepharose-4B linked protein G beads (Sigma Chemical Co.) for 1 h. Beads were collected by centrifugation, washed three times in NP- 40 lysis buffer, and resuspended in SDS-sample buffer. Precipitated proteins were separated by SDS-PAGE and visualized by autoradiography.
6.2. RESULTS
6.2.1. ISOLATION OF NPI-1 The interactive trap was used to identify proteins which specifically interact with the influenza A virus nucleoprotein (NP). The interactive trap is one of several genetic systems recently developed which uses the modular nature of transcription activators to detect protei protein interactions (Chien, et al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88: 9578-9582; Dalton & Treisman, 1992, Cell 68: 597-612; Durfee, et al., 1993, Genes Dev. 7: 555-569; Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803; Vojtek, et al., 1993, Cell 74: 205-214; Zervos, et al., 1993, Cell 72: 222-232). The interactive trap consists of three components: (1) a reporter gene that has no basal transcription; (2) a fusion protein which contains a LexA DNA binding domain that is transcriptionally inert; and (3) proteins encoded by an expression library, which are expressed as fusion proteins containing an activation domain (Fig. 1 A). Interaction of the LexA fusion protein and the fusion protein containing the activation domain will constitute a bimolecular transcriptional activator which, in this case, will confer the ability to grow on media lacking leucine (Gyuris. et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803; Zervos, et al., 1993, Cell 72: 222-232). In the absence of this interaction the leu2 gene is not transcribed. The NP gene of influenza A/PR/8/34 vims was subcloned as a translational fusion gene with the LexA gene into pEG202 to generate pLexA-NP (Fig. IB). Strain R100 (Table II), which contains pLexA-NP, was transformed with a HeLa cell cDNA library constmcted in pJG4-5. pJG4-5 contains an activation domain under control of a GAL1 promoter (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803).
TABLE II YEAST STRAINS USED
Strains Genotype
EGY48 Mata trpl ura3 his3 LEU2::pLEXAop6-LEU2
RI 00 EGY48, pLexA-NP(TRP 1 ) R101 EGY48, pLexA-NP, pSH18-34(HIS3)
R102 EGY48, pRFHMl (TRPl), pSH 18-34
Library plasmids were rescued from 100 leu+ colonies. Reproducibility of the interaction of the NP with the encoded library proteins was tested by transforming library plasmids into strain R101. Transformants were screened for galactose-dependent β-galactosidase activity and growth on media lacking leucine. Specificity for NP was analyzed by checking the ability of library plasmids to confer growth on leu" media and β-galactosidase activity in connection with a different LexA fusion plasmid, pRFHMl, encoding a fragment of the Drosophila melanogaster bicoid protein. Twenty-three library plasmids were confirmed to encode NP-interactive proteins. Twelve identical 2.1 kbp clones encoded the carboxy terminal fragment of a protein termed nucleoprotein interactor 1 (NPI-1). Partial DNA sequencing showed that NPI-1 is the human homologue of the yeast SRP1 gene (infra).
6.2.2. CLONING AND SEQUENCING OF THE NPI-1 cDNA
The 2.1 kbp NPI-1 cDNA in pJG4-5 was sequenced by standard protocols. The 5' cDNA terminus of the NPI-1 gene was cloned by 5' RACE. cDNAs from 3 independently derived NPI-1 5'RACE products were cloned and sequenced. Nucleotide and derived amino acid sequences of NPI-1 are shown in Figure 2. The sequence reveals a 2.9 kbp cDNA which encodes a protein of 527 amino acids with a calculated molecular weight of 58,754 Da and a pi = 4.74. The carboxyl terminal 265 amino acids were encoded by the interactive trap library plasmid and interact with the viral NP.
Comparison of the deduced amino acid sequences in the GenBank and EMBL databases using the FASTA and TFASTA programs (Deveraux, et al., 1984, Nucleic Acids Res. 12: 387-395) demonstrated that NPI-1 is the human homologue of the Saccharomyces cerevisiae protein SRPl (Yano, et al., 1992, Mol. and Cell. Biol. 12: 5640-5651). SRPl was cloned as an allele-specific suppressor of ts mutations in the zinc-binding domain of the A 190 subunit of RNA polymerase I. The amino acid sequence is highly conserved between NPI-1 and SRPl : 50% identity and 81% similarity at the amino acid level. The amino terminus of NPI-1 has a potential nuclear localization signal (Chelsky, et al., 1989, Mol. Cell. Biol. 9:2487-2492); amino acids 25 to 49 are rich in arginine, and contain a stretch of four consecutive arginines at amino acids 28 to 31. NPI-1, like SRPl, contains a series of 8 consecutive ARM motifs, which are 42 amino acid protein subsequences originally identified in the Drosophila armadillo protein (Peifer, et al., Cell 76: 789-791, 1994; Yano, et al., 1992, Mol. and Cell. Biol. 12: 5640-5651) (Fig. 3, infra).
6.2.3. NPI-1 BINDS TO NP IN VITRO In order to demonstrate that the NPI-1 binds to the viral NP, the NPI-1 cDNA fragment (amino acids 262 to 527) was subcloned into the bacterial expression vector pGEX-5X-l yielding a glutathione S-transferase fusion gene. The expressed fusion protein was purified from bacterial lysates on glutathione agarose beads. NP, which had been partially purified with the viral polymerase from influenza A/PR/8/34 vims was specifically precipitated from solution by glutathione agarose beads complexed with GST-NPI-1 (Fig. 4). The NP band migrates slightly faster than that of the GST-NPI-1 fusion protein. The identity of this protein was confirmed by immunoblot analysis using the anti-NP monoclonal antibody HT103 (Fig. 4, lane 8).
6.2.4. IMMUNODETECTION OF NPI-1 IN CELL EXTRACTS Rabbit antisera raised against GST-NPI-1 were used to identify a polypeptide from total cellular extracts of both HeLa and MDBK cells with an apparent molecular weight of 65 kDa (Fig. 5). The molecular weight predicted from the derived amino acid sequence of the cDNA is slightly smaller (59 kDa). A lower amount of NPI-1 was present in the cytoplasmic fraction generated by lysis of cells in the presence of NP-40 than in the total cellular extract suggesting that most of NPI-1 is located in the nucleus (Fig. 5). This is consistent with results localizing the NPI-1 homologue SRPl to the nucleus of yeast cells by immunofluorescence (Yano, et al., 1992, Mol. and Cell. Biol. 12: 5640-5651).
Localization of NPI-1 to a particular intracellular compartment by immunofluorescence experiments has not been possible due to the high background fluorescence of the antisera preparations used. 5
6.2.5. NPI-1 INTERACTS WITH NP IN INFECTED CELLS Since NP formed a complex with NPI-1 in vitro, whether NP and NPI-1 form a complex in infected cells was examined. NP was specifically coimmunoprecipitated from extracts of influenza A/WSN vims infected HeLa cells by antisera directed against NPI-1 10 (Fig. 6). This demonstrates an interaction of the viral NP and the cellular NPI-1 during influenza A vims infection.
7. EXAMPLE: THE IDENTIFICATION OF NSlI-1 AND ITS INTERACTION WITH INFLUENZA NSl PROTEIN
15
In the example described below, the yeast interactive trap system was used to identify a human protein, NSl I-l (NSl -interactor- 1), from a HeLa cell cDNA library on the basis of its binding to NSl of influenza A vims. NSl I-l is shown herein to be recognized not only by NSl proteins from five human and avian influenza A strains, but also by NSl of
9n influenza B vims. Surprisingly, NSl I-l is homologous to a steroid dehydrogenase isolated from pigs (Leenders, et al., 1994, Eur. J. Biochem. 222: 221-227). Several proteins with a dehydrogenase function have recently been shown not only to have enzymatic activity but also to be involved in post-transcriptional events of gene-expression (Hentze, 1994, Trends
Biochem. Sci. 19: 101-103). This strong conservation supports an important functional role of the NSl I-l interaction during the viral life cycle.
25
7.1. MATERIALS AND METHODS
7.1.1. YEAST. E. COLI STRAINS. AND PLASMIDS τn Manipulations of nucleic acids, Escherichia coli and yeast followed essentially standard procedures as described elsewhere (Ausubel, et al., 1992, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Green Publishing Associates, Inc., and John Wiley & sons, Inc., New York). The yeast strains EGY40 (Mat a trpl ura3 his 3) and EGY48 (Mata trpl ura3 his 3 LEU2::pLEX-Aop6-LEU2) as well as plasmids pEG202, pRFHMl, and pSH18-34, and the HeLa cell cDNA constmcted in pJG4-5 have been described (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75:
35 791-803; Zervos, et al., 1993, Cell 72: 222-232). E. coli strains used for cloning and expression were MH3 (trpC araD lacX hsdR galU galK), DH5α (F'Φ80dlacZΔM15 Δ(lacZY-argF)U169 deoR recAl endAl hsdR17(rK-mK+) supE44λ-thi- gyrA96 relAl), and BL26 (F ompT hsdSB(rB "mB ") gal dcm). pLexA-NSl was constmcted by subcloning the cDNA of the NS segment of influenza vims A/PR/8/34 downstream of the LexA gene in pEG202. pGEX-NSlI-1 was constmcted by subcloning the HeLa cDNA-insert of library plasmid pK5 as an EcoRI/XboI-fragment into pGEX-5X-l (Pharmacia). DNA- oligonucleotides used were: GSP-I, 5'-dTCCTGATGTTGCTGTAGACG-3' (SEQ ID NO:27), GSP-II, 5'-dGCACGACTAGTATGATTTGC-3* (SEQ ID NO:28), and the 5'RACE anchor primer (BRL), 5'-dCUACUACUACUAGGCCACGCGTCGACTACTACGGGIIGGGIIGGGIIG-3' (SEQ ID NO:26).
7.1.2. IDENTIFICATION OF NS1-LNTERACTORS The interactive trap selection was performed essentially as described for NPI-1 in Section 6.1.2, above. The selection strain was constmcted by transforming EGY48 with the bait plasmid pLexA-NSl and the lacZ-reporter plasmid pSHl 8-34. Expression of lacZ from pSH 18-34 is transcriptionally controlled by a GAL1 promoter and LexA-dependent operator sites. A HeLa cell cDNA library was introduced into the selection strain using the lithium acetate method (Ito, et al., 1983, J. Bacteriol. 153: 163-168). Primary transformants were selected on trp'his ura' glucose plates. 1 x 106 cells representing 3.3 x 105 independent transformants were plated on 150 mm trp"his"ura"leu'-galactose plates to select for clones expressing NSl -interacting proteins. Viable cells were replica-transferred to a nitrocellulose filter and assayed for β-galactosidase activity using 5-bromo-4-chloro-3- indolyl β-D-galactoside (X-gal) as described (Ausubel, et al., 1992, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Green Publishing Associates, Inc., and John Wiley & sons, Inc., New York). Positive clones were tested in a second round of selection by replica plating onto X- gal trphis ura" galactose plates. Plasmid DNA was isolated from yeast clones expressing β- galactosidase activity only on galactose plates and library plasmids were recovered by transformation into E.coli MH3 as described in Section 6.1.2, above. The specificity of the isolated plasmids was tested by co-transformation with pLexA-NSl or pRFHMl into
EGY40 harboring pSH 18-34. pRFHMl expresses an unrelated LexA-bicoid fusion protein. The resulting strains were assayed for β-galactosidase activity on X-gal trp'his'ura" plates containing glucose or galactose. Plasmids that induced β-galactosidase only in the presence of galactose and only in conjunction with pLexA-NSl were considered to encode tme interacting proteins. 7.1.3. CLONING OF NSl I-l 5'-END cDNA Cloning of cDNA derived from the 5'-end of NSlI-1 mRNA followed a RACE- procedure (rapid amplification of cDNA ends) (Frohman, et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
USA 85: 8998-9002) using a 5'RACE-kit (BRL). First strand cDNA was synthesized from 1 μg of HeLa cell poly(A)-RNA hybridized to 2.5 pmol NSl I-l -specific oligonucleotide
GSP-I using reverse transcriptase. The cDNA was tailed at the 5'-end with dC by terminal transferase. The product was used as a template for the amplification of a 5'RACE-product by PCR using a nested oligonucleotide GSP-II and an anchor primer provided by the kit.
The resulting fragment was subcloned in pGEM-T (Promega) to form pRACENSlI-1, and sequenced by the standard dideoxy method. The NCBI-search was conducted using Fasta,
Tfasta. Sequence comparison was conducted using Bestfit.
7.1.4. NORTHERN BLOT ANALYSIS 1 μg of HeLa cell poly(A)-RNA was separated on a 1 agarose-formaldehyde gel, transferred to a nylon membrane (Nytran, Amersham), and UV-crosslinked. The RNA was hybridized to a 32P-labeled, NSl I-l -specific probe derived form a fragment (corresponding to positions +791 to +1745) of the original pK5 library isolate as described (Ausubel, et al., 1992, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Green Publishing Associates, Inc., and John Wiley & sons, Inc., New York).
7.1.5. VIRUSES. CELLS. AND EXTRACTS Influenza strains A/WSN/33 (H1N1), A Berkeley/1/68 (H2N2), A/Beijing/32/92 (H3N2), A/duck/Alberta 76 (N12N5), A/turkey/Oregon/71 (H7N5), and B/Lee/40 were grown in the allantoic cavity of 10 days old embryonated chicken eggs. Confluent monolayers of Madin Darby canine kidney-(MDCK)-cells were infected with influenza vimses at an m.o.i. of 10 for one hour in 35 mm dishes. Infection was continued at 37°C (influenza A vimses) or 35 °C (influenza B/Lee/40) for 5 hours in MEM-medium containing 0.1 bovine semm albumin. Cells were labeled with 100 μCi of 35S-methionine and 35S-cysteine (ICN) per dish for one hour in MEM-met cys -medium. Cells were washed and scraped in ice-cold phosphate buffered saline (PBS). Cells from one dish were lysed with 500 μl NET-N buffer (lOmM Tris/HCl pH 8.0, 1 mM EDTA, 150 mM NaCI, 0.05 Nonidet P 40) and two 30 second pulses in a Raytheon sonicator at a setting of 1 A. Lysates were centrifuged for 10 minutes at 20,000 rpm in a TL 100.3 rotor. The supernatants were used for precipitation of proteins. 7.1.6. EXPRESSION OF GST-NSl I-l FUSION PROTEIN IN E. COLI AND PRECIPITATION OF VIRAL PROTEINS FROM CELL EXTRACTS
NSl I-l was expressed in E. coli BL26 from pGEX-NSlI-1 as a GST (glutathione-S- transferase)-NSH-l fusion protein with a predicted molecular weight of 77 kDa.
Production of GST-NSl I-l was induced using isopropyl-β-D-galactopyranoside essentially as described (Smith & Johnson, 1988, Gene 67: 31-40). GST-NS1I-1 was adsorbed from bacterial lysates to glutathione sepharose beads (Pharmacia) as recommended by the manufacturer. Beads were washed three times with PBS to remove contaminating proteins.
10 μl of glutathione sepharose coated with GST-NSl I-l fusion protein was rotated with 100 μl extract of vims-infected MDCK-cells (see above) in 750 μl NET- 100 buffer (20 mM
Hepes, pH 8.0, lOOmM NaCI, 0.5 mM DTT) for 90 minutes at 4°C. The beads were washed three times with PBS/0.05 NP-40 and precipitated proteins were analyzed by SDS- gel electrophoresis and autoradiography. In parallel reactions, viral proteins were immunoprecipitated from 50 μl of infected cell extracts using 5 μl of anti-NSl or anti-Mi antiserum and protein A agarose as described (Harlow and Lane, 1988, Antibodies: A
Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratories Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY). As a negative control, GST protein was expressed in BL26 from pGEX-5X-l and used the same way in the co-precipitation assay.
7.2. RESULTS 7.2.1. ISOLATION OF NSl -INTERACTING FACTORS
The yeast interaction trap system (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803; Zervos, et al., 1993, Cell 72: 222-232) was used to identify cellular proteins that interact with the nonstmctural protein NSl of influenza A vims. A LexA-NSl fusion protein was used as bait to screen library in which HeLa cell cDNAs were expressed as fusions with an acidic transcription activation domain (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803, #159). Colonies were selected, in which either of two reporter genes, LEU2 and lacZ, were activated by the cDNA-encoded proteins. This double selection scheme was used to increase the stringency, because in an initial screen a high proportion of candidates scored negative in subsequent genetic tests. The library plasmids were isolated from the selected clones.
The binding specificity of the encoded fusion proteins was tested by assaying the activation of a lacZ-reporter gene encoded on pSH 18-34. Expression of β-galactosidase from this plasmid is transcriptionally controlled by LexA-specific operator sites. The isolated library plasmids were co-transformed with pLexA-NSl or pRFHMl into EGY40 harboring pSH 18-34. pRFHMl expresses a LexA-bicoid fusion protein and was used as a non-specific operator-binding control. The resulting strains were assayed for β- galactosidase activity specifically on X-gal plates containing galactose, but not glucose. From 3.3 x 105 independent library transformants, three plasmids were isolated that induced galactose-specific activation of the lacZ reporter gene only in combination with pLexA- 5 NS 1. Sequence analysis indicated that the three plasmids were each derived from different cellular cDNAs.
7.2.2. CLONING AND SEQUENCE ANALYSIS OF NSl I-l One of the isolated plasmids, pK5, was analyzed further. It carried a cDNA-insert of
10 1781 bp with an open reading frame of 1413 nucleotides followed by 368 nucleotides of a potentially untranslated region (Fig. 12). The cDNA terminated with an oligo(A)-tract and had a consensus poly(A)-site at positions 2526-2531. Northern blot analysis of HeLa cell poly(A)-RNA using a NSl I-l -specific probe detected one single transcript of about 3.0 kb suggesting that the pK5 insert represented an incomplete cDNA (Fig. 13). The remaining
15 NSlI-1 cDNA was cloned by a 5'RACE procedure (Frohman, et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85: 8998-9002). Four independent clones were sequenced that differed only in length at the very 5'-end. The longest 5'RACE product, contained in pRACENSlI-1, extended the NSl I-l sequence for 893 nucleotides upstream totaling in a cDNA of 2674 bp (Fig. 12). The sequence has one long open reading frame encoding a protein of 735 amino 0 acids with a predicted molecular mass of 79.5 kDa and a pi of 9.06. The putative ATG-start codon is located 103 nucleotides downstream of the 5 '-end and is in the context of a sequence consistent with its being a translational start (Kozak, 1989, J. Cell Biol. 108: 229- 241).
Sequence comparisons through the EMBL- and Genbank databases using the 5 FASTA- and TFASTA-analysis programs revealed that NSl I-l is highly homologous to porcine 17β-estradiol dehydrogenase (Leenders, et al., 1994, Eur. J. Biochem. 222: 221- 227). The two cDNAs are 86 identical on the nucleic acid level. The encoded proteins are 84 identical and are 92 similar when allowing for conserved amino acid substitutions. NSl I-l cDNA also shows strong homology to ten human cDNA fragments that have been 0 isolated as expressed sequence tags, as revealed by a BLAST-analysis of the NCBI-database (fragments are between 134 to 556 bp in length). These cDNAs were derived from different tissues including liver, spleen, brain, adipose tissue, and adrenals tissue indicating a broad expression of NSl I-l in the body.
The encoded NSl I-l protein features two conserved sequence motifs of the short- 5 chain alcohol dehydrogenase family (Persson, et al., 1991, Eur. J. Biochem. 200: 537-543). Specifically, amino acids 15 to 22 (TGAGAGCG; SEQ ID NO:29) are similar to the potential co-factor binding site, and residues 163 to 167 (YSAAK; SEQ ID NO:30) correspond to a short stretch that has been suggested to participate in catalysis (Chen, et al., 1993, Biochemistry 32: 3342-3346). The presence of the tri-peptide AKL at the carboxy- terminus was also noted. Similar tri-peptide motifs have been found to serve as targeting signals for import into microbodies (for a review, see de Hoop & Ab, 1992, Biochem. J. 286: 657-669). However, the presence of this signal does not automatically direct a protein to these organelles (de Hoop & Ab, 1992, Biochem. J. 286: 657-669).
7.2.3. NSlI-1 BINDS NSl PROTEIN FROM EXTRACTS OF
INFLUENZA VIRUS INFECTED CELLS
In order to confirm a physical interaction between NSl I-l protein and NSl expressed in influenza vims infected cells, a co-precipitation assay was performed as similarly described in Section 6.2.3, above, for NPI-1. A glutathione-S-transferase (GST)-NSlI-l fusion gene was constmcted and expressed in E.coli. GST-NSl I-l fusion protein from bacterial lysate was absorbed to the affinity matrix glutathione agarose and purified from contaminating bacterial proteins. The immobilized fusion protein was used to bind and precipitate 35S-labeled proteins from extracts of MDCK cells infected with human influenza A/WSN/33 vimses (Fig. 14). The NSl protein of this strain is 98 identical to its counterpart from A/PR/8/34 used in the yeast interaction screen. Aliquots of the same extract were used to in parallel reactions to immunoprecipitate influenza vims proteins NSl and Ml . The precipitated proteins were analyzed by SDS-gel electrophoresis and visualized by fluorography. Fig. 14 shows, that GST-NSl I-l efficiently precipitated a protein band co- migrating with immunoprecipitated NS 1 protein from infected cell extract (compare lanes 2 and 3). This interaction was specific for NSl I-l since no proteins were detected in precipitates using GST only (lane 6). In addition, no proteins were precipitated by GST- NSl I-l from mock-infected cells (lane 8), showing that a vims induced protein was recognized by NS 11- 1. This experiment confirmed, that NS 11- 1 interacts specifically with the NSl protein of influenza A vims.
If this interaction is important for the viral life-cycle one would expect it to be conserved. Consequently, the binding of NSl I-l to NSl proteins from other influenza A strains should be detectable despite of their considerable variation in the primary stmcture (Baez, et al, 1981, Virology 113: 397-402; Ludwig, et al., 1991, Virology 183: 566-577).
Therefore the interaction between NSl I-l and NSl was examined using the same co- precipitation assay described above, with extracts from cells infected with different influenza A and B vims strains.
Mutations accumulate in the NSl gene at a steady rate over time (Buonagurio, et al., 1985, Science 232: 980-982). Thus, the time-span between the isolation of two strains is reflected in the sequence variation of its NS 1 proteins (Ludwig, et al., 1991 , Virology 183 : 566-577; Buonagurio, et al., 1985, Science 232: 980-982). NSlI-1 binding to NSl proteins from two recently isolated human influenza A strains A/Beijing/32/92 and A/Berkeley/1/68 was examined. As can be seen in Fig. 15, Panels C and D, respectively, NSl proteins from both strains were specifically precipitated (Fig. 15, Panels C and D, lanes "GST-K5"). A low immunoprecipitation efficiency of NSl protein from the Beijing-strain (Panel C) was reproducibly observed. The NSl proteins of A/Berkeley/1/68 and A/WSN/33 are 90.8 identical to each other. The NSl sequence of A/Beijing/32/92 is not known.
The following analyses were conducted to examine whether GST-NSl I-l is also recognized by the more divergent NSl proteins of the avian influenza strains A/duck/Alberta/76 and A/turkey/Oregon/71. The NSl proteins of these strains are 66.5 and 63.6 identical, respectively, to A/WSN/33. Significantly, NSl of A/turkey/Oregon/71 is only 124 amino acids in length, lacking most of the carboxy-terminal half of other NSl proteins, which consist of 207 to 237 amino acids (Norton, et al., 1987, Virology 156: 204- 213). Nevertheless, precipitation of a protein band co-migrating with NSl from both strains was observed (Fig. 15, Panels A and B, lanes "GST-K5"). The NSl and Ml proteins of A/duck/Alberta/76 could not be separated by the gel system used. Significant amounts of nucleoprotein in the GST-NSl I-l precipitates of these avian strains were reproducibly detected for undetermined reasons.
Finally, the co-precipitation assay was used to test the human influenza B vims B/Lee/40. Surprisingly, GST-NSl I-l precipitated specifically the influenza B vims NSl protein, although it is only 20.6 identical to NSl from A/WSN/33 (Fig. 15, Panel E, lane "GST-K5"). Taken together, the binding of GST-NSl I-l to NSl proteins expressed by several influenza A and B vims stains could be demonstrated, despite the great divergence of their primary stmctures. This result strongly supports an important function of this interaction during the viral life cycle, and indicates that the NSl I-l interaction is an excellent target for antiviral intervention. 8. EXAMPLE: THE IDENTIFICATION OF NSl -BINDING
PROTEIN (NSl-BP) AND IT INTERACTION WITH INFLUENZA NSl PROTEIN
In the example described below, the yeast interactive trap system (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803; Zervos, et al., 1993. Cell 72: 223-232) was used to screen for cellular proteins that interact with the NS 1 protein and to identify and characterize a human 70 kDa protein, termed NSl -binding protein (NSl-BP), which interacts with the nonstmctural NSl protein of the influenza A vims. The genetic interaction was confirmed by the specific coprecipitation of the NSl protein from solution by a GST-NS 1-BP fusion protein and glutathione Sepharose in vitro. NSl-BP contains an N-terminal BTB/POZ domain and five kelch-like tandem repeat elements of -50 amino acids.
In non-infected cells, affinity-purified antibodies localized NS 1 -BP in discrete nuclear domains which are enriched in spliceosome assembly factor SC35, a pre-mRNA splicing factor. This suggests an association of NSl-BP with the cellular splicing apparatus. However, in influenza A vims-infected cells, NS 1 -BP relocalized throughout the nucleoplasm and appeared distinct from the SC35 domains which suggests that NSl-BP function may be disturbed or altered. The addition of a tmncated NSl-BP mutant protein inhibited pre-mRNA splicing in HeLa cell nuclear extracts in vitro, possibly as the result of a dominant-negative effect on the endogenous protein, but it did not inhibit spliceosome assembly. These results suggest a role for NSl-BP in pre-mRNA splicing and support a model in which the NSl / NSl-BP interaction has a role in mediating the splicing-inhibitory effect of the NSl protein.
8.1. MATERIALS AND METHODS
8.1.1. VIRUSES, CELLS AND EXTRACTS Influenza A/WSN/33 vims was grown in the allantoic cavity of 10-day-old embryonated chicken eggs. HeLa, Hep-2 and 293 cells were passaged in Dulbecco's modified Eagle's tissue culture medium (D-MEM) containing 10 fetal calf semm. For immunoblot analysis, confluent cell monolayers grown in 35 mm dishes were lysed in RIPA buffer containing 150 mM NaCI, 1.0 Nonidet P-40, 0.5 deoxycholate, 0.1 sodium dodecyl sulfate, 50 mM Tris/HCl, pH8.0. Lysates were clarified by centrifugation for 10 min at 13,000 g and supernatants were used for immunoblot analysis. 8.1.2. YEAST STRAINS. E. COLI STRAINS AND PLASMIDS E. coli strains used for cloning and expression were MH3 (trpC arά lacX hsdR galU galK), DH5- (X Φ80dlacZΔM\5 A(lacZY A-argΕ) l 69 deoR ec Al endAI hsdRll( rκ "mκ +) s pEM λ thi-l gyr A96 re/Al), BL26 (X ompThsdSB (rB "mB ") gal dcm)
5 and XLlBlue recAI endAI gyrA96 thi-1 hsdRI 7 supE44 relAI lac {¥' pro AB lacIqZAM15 TnlO (Tetr)}. Saccharomyces cerevisiae EGY48 (Mata trpl ura3 his3 LEU2::pLEX-Aop6- LEU2), plasmids pSH 18-34, pRFHMl and the HeLa cell cDNA expression library constmcted in pJG4-5 were kindly provided by R. Brent (Harvard Medical School) and have been described previously (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803; Zervos, et al., 1993,
10 Cell 72: 223-232). The constmctions of plasmids pLexA-NSl, pcDNA3-NSl and pGEX- NS1 have been described elsewhere (Wolff, et al., 1996, J. Virol. 70: 5363-5372). SP6- MINX (Zillmann, et al., 1988, Mol. Cell. Biol. 8: 814-821) was used as a template for transcription of synthetic pre-mRNA. Constmction of plasmids followed standard cloning procedures (Ausubel, et al., 1992, Current protocols in molecular biology. John Wiley &
15 Sons, New York). Plasmid pGEX-NSl-BP was made by subcloning the HeLa cDNA from the library plasmid (see below) into pGEX-5X-l (Pharmacia). The bacterial expression plasmids pGEX-NSl-BP-REP and pMAL-NS 1 -BP-REP were generated by inserting NSl- BP cDNA corresponding to amino acids 1-368 (nucleotide positions 1 to 1104) between the EcoRI/XhoI-sites of pGEX-5X-l (Pharmacia) and the EcoRI/Sall-sites of pMAL-c2 (New
20 England Biolabs), respectively.
8.1.3. IDENTIFICATION AND ISOLATION OF NS 1 -INTERACTING cDNA CLONES USING THE YEAST INTERACTION TRAP
The yeast interaction trap was used to identify and to isolate HeLa cell cDNAs r encoding NSl binding factors as was previously described (Wolff, et al., 1996, J. Virol. 70:
5363-5372). In brief, EGY48 was transformed with the bait plasmid pLexA-NSl and the lacZ reporter plasmid pSH18-34. Subsequently, this strain was transformed with a plasmid library, in which HeLa cell cDNAs were conditionally expressed as fusions with an acidic activation domain from a GAL1 promoter. 3.3 x 105 primary transformants were screened
,n for interaction as determined by their ability to grow on minimal synthetic medium in the absence of leucine and to activate the lacZ reporter gene specifically on plates containing galactose but not glucose. The library plasmid p59-l was isolated from one selected clone by transformation in E. coli MH3 as described elsewhere (O'Neill, et al., 1994, Virology
206: 116-125). The specificity of the interaction was examined by retransformation of p59-l into EGY48- harbouring pSH 18-34 together with pLexA-NSl or with pRFHMl, which expresses an unrelated fusion of LexA with the bicoid protein of D. melanogaster. p59-l activated the lacZ reporter gene specifically in the presence of galactose in combination with pLexA-NSl, but not with pRFHMl. p59-l was sequenced using a standard chain termination protocol.
8.1.4. CLONING OF NSl-BP 5'-END cDNA cDNA corresponding to the 5'-end of NSl-BP mRNA was obtained by a 5'-RACE (rapid amplification of cDNA ends) procedure using a 5'RACE kit (Gibco-BRL). 2.5 pmol of the specific DNA oligonucleotide 59GSP1 (dCATTCCTCTCTGTTATAGCC (SEQ ID NO:31), corresponding to positions 1123 to 1142 of NSl-BP cDNA) was hybridized to 1 μg of HeLa poly(A)+-RNA to prime first strand cDNA synthesis by M-MLV reverse transcriptase. The cDNA was tailed with dC using terminal transferase. The product was used as a template to amplify double stranded cDNA by PCR with the nested primer 59GSP2 (dCCACCTGCAGCTATGAG (SEQ ID NO:32), positions 1108 to 1124) and the 5'RACE anchor primer. The resulting product was subcloned into pGEM-T (Promega) to generate pGEM-NS 1 -BP-5'RACE plasmids. The NS 1 -BP cDNA was sequenced by the standard dideoxy method.
8.1.5. NORTHERN BLOT ANALYSIS 1 μg of HeLa cell poly(A)+-RNA was electrophoresed on a 1 agarose-formaldehyde gel, transferred onto a Nytran (Amersham) nylon membrane and immobilized by UV- crosslinking. A 32P-labeled NSl-BP-specific probe comprising positions 1038 to 2215 was used to detect NSl-BP mRNA by hybridization as described (Ausubel, et al., 1992, Current protocols in molecular biology. John Wiley & Sons, New York).
8.1.6. CO-PRECIPITATION OF NS 1 PROTEIN WITH GST-NS 1 -HP BY
GLUTATHIONE SEPHAROSE
NSl-BP (amino acids 347-619) was expressed from pGEX-NSl-BP as a glutathione- S-transferase (GST) fusion protein in E. coli BL26. Synthesis of GST-NS 1-BP was induced by addition of 1 mM isopropyl-β-D-galactopyranoside (IPTG). Bacterial cell lysate containing the GST-NS 1-BP fusion protein was adsorbed to glutathione Sepharose
(Pharmacia) according to the protocol supplied by the manufacturer. Contaminating proteins were removed by three washes with phosphate-buffered-saline (PBS). NSl protein was synthesized and labeled with [35S]-methionine in coupled 50 μl transcription/translation reactions (Promega-TNT, Promega) programmed with pcDNA3-NSl. The translation reaction was mixed with 10 μl coated glutathione Sepharose beads in 750 μl of HN100 buffer (20 mM Hepes, pH8.0, 100 mM NaCI, 0.01 Nonidet P40 [NP-40]) for 2 h at 4°C. The beads were washed three times with PBS/ 0.01 NP-40 and the precipitated proteins were separated by SDS gel electrophoresis and visualized by autoradiography.
5 8.1.7. ANTI-NS1-BP-SERUM AND IMMUNOBLOT ANALYSES
The GST-NSl -BP-REP fusion protein carrying amino acids 1-368 of NSl-BP was expressed in E. coli BL26 transformed with pGEX-NSl -BP-REP and affinity-purified on glutathione Sepharose resin (Pharmacia) as recommended by the manufacturer. A six month
, n old female rabbit was immunized with 400 μg purified GST-NSl -BP-REP fusion protein in complete Freund's adjuvant followed by booster injections of 250 μg fusion protein in incomplete adjuvant at a four week interval. NSl-BP-specific antibodies were purified from semm by affinity-chromatography using an antigen-resin. For the constmction of this matrix, a MAL-N SI -BP-REP fusion protein in which the maltose-binding protein of E. coli
, ^ was fused to amino acids 1-368 of NSl-BP was expressed in E. coli XLl-Blue cells and affinity-purified on an amylose affinity column (New England Biolabs). The MAL-NS1- BP-REP fusion protein was immobilized on CNBr-activated Sepharose (Pharmacia) and the resulting resin was used for the affinity-purification of NSl-BP-specific antibodies as described elsewhere (Harlow, et al., 1988, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring
9f) Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, NY). The purified antibodies were diluted 1 :200 for immunoblot experiments using standard procedures (Harlow, et al., 1988, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, NY).
8.1.8. INDIRECT IMMUNOFLUORESCENCE MICROSCOPY , ,. HeLa cells were grown to 50 confluency on glass cover slips in D-MEM containing
10 fetal calf semm. Where indicated, cells were infected at a multiplicity of 10 with influenza A/WSN/33 vims diluted in PBS for one hour at 37 °C. Infection was continued under tissue culture medium at 37 °C. Cells were processed for immunofluorescence analysis by fixation in 2.5 methanol-free formaldehyde (Polysciences Inc.) diluted in PBS ^π and permeabilization of cells in 0.1 Triton X-100 was done as described (Wolff, et al., 1996, J. Virol. 70: 5363-5372). Cells were stained with primary antibodies diluted in PBS-3 bovine semm albumin. Affinity-purified anti-NS 1 -BP antibodies and the NS 1 -specific monoclonal antibody IA7 (a kind gift of Jonathan Yewdell, National Institutes of Health) were used at 1 :100 dilutions. The anti-SC35 antibody (Fu, et al., 1990, Nature 343: 437- ,,- 441) was purchased from Pharmingen Inc. and used at a dilution of 1 :1000. The cells were washed and incubated with fluorescein isothiocyanate (FITC)-conjugated sheep anti-rabbit immunoglobulin G (IgG) and or Texas Red-conjugated goat anti-mouse IgG. Subsequently, the coverslips were washed and mounted in MOWIOL 4-88 (Calbiochem) as described (Harlow, et al., 1988, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, NY). For conventional immunofluorescence analysis, cells were viewed on a Zeiss Axiovert 100 fluorescence microscope using a 63x objective and photographs were captured by a CF8/10x video camera (Kappa GmBH). A Zeiss LSM 410 Invert microscope equipped with a lOOx objective lens was used for confocal laser scanning microscopy. Digitized images were pseudocolored using PHOTOSHOP® software (Adobe Systems Inc.).
8.1.9. SPLICEOSOME ASSEMBLY AND SPLICING OF A 32P-LABELLED PRE-mRNA IN THE PRESENCE OF GST PROTEINS
GST, GST-NSl and GST-NS 1-BP fusion proteins were expressed in E.coli BL26 and affinity-purified on glutathione Sepharose (Pharmacia) columns as recommended by the manufacturer. GST proteins were eluted with 20 mM glutathione in 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 8.0, dialyzed versus buffer D (20 mM Hepes, pH 8.0, 100 mM KC1, 20 glycerol, 0.2 mM EDTA, 0.5 mM DTT) and stored at -80 °C. The purity of the prepared proteins was tested by SDS gel electrophoresis and staining by Coomassie Blue. HeLa cell nuclear extract was prepared as described (Dignam, et al., 1983, Nucleic Acids Res. 11 : 1475-1489). 32P- labelled MINX pre-mRNA was synthesized as described (Wolff, et al., 1992, EMBO J. 11 : 345-359). In a typical splicing reaction 4 ng of pre-mRNA were incubated in a 100 μl volume containing 40 HeLa cell nuclear extract, 3.2 mM MgCl2, 0.5 mM ATP, 20 mM creatine phosphate, 60 mM KC1. 8 μg of GST or equimolar amounts of GST fusion proteins were added where indicated and the reactions were incubated at 30 °C. The formation of splicing complexes was analyzed after treatment with heparin (1 mg/ml) by electrophoresis on native acrylamide/agarose gels (Nelson, et al., 1988, Genes Dev. 2: 319-329). For RNA analysis, splicing products were purified and analyzed by electrophoresis on denaturing 13 acrylamide-urea gels.
8.1.10. SEQUENCE COMPARISONS
The NSl-BP cDNA and its derived amino acid sequence were compared to the GenBank and EMBL databases using the FASTA and TFASTA software (Deveraux, et al., 1984, Nucleic Acids Res. 12: 387-395). The PILEUP and PRETTY programs of the Genetics Computer Group (University of Madison, Wisconsin) were used to align the repeat elements of NSl-BP and to create a consensus sequence. 8.2. RESULTS
8.2.1. ISOLATION OF NSl BINDING FACTORS The yeast interaction trap system (Gyuris, et al., 1993, Cell 75: 791-803; Zervos, et al., 1993, Cell 72: 223-232) was used to identify cellular proteins that bind to the NSl protein of the influenza A vims (Wolff, et al., 1996, J. Virol. 70: 5363-5372). A constitutively expressed LexA-NS 1 fusion protein was used to screen a HeLa cell cDNA plasmid library, in which cDNA-encoded proteins were conditionally expressed as translational fusions with an acidic activation domain from a GAL1 promoter. Expression of the acidic domain fusion proteins is induced in the presence of galactose and repressed by glucose. 3.3 x 105 primary yeast transformants were screened for the galactose-dependent activation of LEU2 and lacZ reporter genes, which are regulated by LexA-specific operator sites. Three library plasmids were isolated from selected transformants that reproduced the interacting phenotype upon retransformation with pLexA-NSl, but not with the control plasmid pRFHMl. The analysis of the human cDNA isolated through one of these library plasmids, ρ59-l, which encodes a novel human protein, NSl-BP is described in the following subsections.
8.2.2. CLONING AND ANALYSIS OF NSl-BP cDNA p59-l had a 1.2 kb cDNA insert containing one long open reading frame of 819 bp followed by 338 bp of an untranslated region that terminated in a run of 20 adenosines (Fig. 16). Northern blot analysis of HeLa cell poly(A)-RNA was used to determine if the size of the isolated HeLa cDNA corresponded to a complete copy of NSl-BP mRNA. A 32P-labeled NSl -BP-specific probe hybridized mainly to an RNA species of approximately 3.1 kb in size (Fig. 17). This result suggested that p59-l carried an incomplete copy of NSl-BP mRNA. A 5'RACE (rapid amplification of cDNA ends) procedure to generate cDNA derived from the 5'- end of NSl-BP mRNA was employed . The RACE-products were subcloned and six resulting plasmid clones were isolated and sequenced. The longest 5'RACE clone extended the NSl-BP cDNA to a total of 2752 bp (Fig. 16). Sequence analysis revealed the presence of one long open reading frame of 1857 nucleotides that encodes a 619 amino acid protein with a predicted molecular mass of 69.7 kDa. The initiator ATG codon of the open reading frame is in a sequence context which is compatible with being a translational start site (Kozak, 1989, J. Cell Biol. 108: 229-241). Analysis of the sequence of NSl-BP revealed the presence of five imperfect repeat elements of 47-49 amino acids at the C-terminal region between amino acids 368 to 607 (Fig. 18). These tandem repeats are 18 to 41 identical to each other and five positions are invariant between domains.
The cDNA and the deduced amino acid sequence of NSl-BP were compared to sequences in the GenBank and EMBL databases using the FASTA and TFASTA algorithms (Deveraux, et al., 1984, Nucleic Acids Res. 12: 387-395). Two regions of NSl-BP were identified which had homology to other proteins. First, the N-terminal - 120 amino acids of NSl-BP are homologous to the BTB (bric-a-brac, tramtrack, broad complex)/POZ (poxvimses and zinc fingers) domain that was identified in several zinc finger proteins known to act as transcriptional regulators (Bardwell, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8: 1664-1677; Zollmann, et al., 1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91 : 10717-10721). Second, the five tandem repeats located between NSl-BP residues 368 and 607 are homologous to the 50 amino acid kelch motif that was originally found in the Drosophila Kelch protein (Bork, et al., 1994, J. Mol. Biol. 236: 1277-1282; Xue, et al., 1993, Cell 72: 681-693). The Kelch protein is a component of the intercellular ring canals in the Drosophila egg chamber. Its function is required for the development of fertile oocytes since mutations in the kelch gene can cause a sterile phenotype in females (Xue, et al., 1993, Cell 72: 681-693). Interestingly, the Kelch protein also contains a predicted BTB/POZ domain. In total, the NSl-BP is 31 identical in amino acid sequence to Kelch. Several other proteins were identified which have both kelch and BTB/POZ domains. These include the murine ENC-1 protein which is specifically expressed in the nervous system (Hernandez, et al., 1997, J. Neurosci 17: 3038-3051), human and bovine calicin, components of the mammalian sperm head (von Bϋlow, et al., 1995, Exp. Cell. Res. 219: 407-413), the predicted product of the human KIAA0132 gene (Nagase, et al., 1995, DNA Res. 2:167-174) and the proteins encoded by genes of vaccinia vims (A55R, C2L, and F3L) (Goebel, et al., 1990, Virology 179: 247-266), the Shope fibroma vims (T6, T8 and T9) (Upton, et al., 1990, Virology 179: 618-631), variola major vims (D16L, C7L, J6R, B20R) (Massung, et al., 1994, Virology 201 : 215-240) and swine pox vims (C4L, C13L) (Massung, et al., 1993, Virology 197: 511-528). The functions of the viral gene products are not known. Several cellular kelch-repeat proteins containing no BTB/POZ domains were found, including the α- and β-scmin proteins which are expressed in the sperm of the horseshoe crab L. polyphemus (Way, et al., 1995, J. Cell Sci. 108: 3155-3162; Way, M., et al., 1995. J. Cell Biol. 128: 51-60), the products of the mouse intracistemal A particle- promoted placenta (MIPP) gene (Chang- Yeh, et al., 1991, Nucl. Acids Res. 19: 3667-3672) and the spe26 gene of C. elegans (Varkey, et al., 1995, Genes Dev. 9:1074-1086). 8.2.3. THE NSl PROTEIN BINDS TO NSl-BP IN VITRO To confirm the interaction of NSl and the NSl-BP in vitro, binding assays were performed. NSl-BP cDNA isolated through the library plasmid in the interaction trap screen (corresponding to NSl-BP amino acids 347-619) was fused to the glutathione-S-transferase (GST) gene in a bacterial expression vector. GST-NS 1-BP fusion protein was expressed in E. coli and adsorbed to glutathione Sepharose beads. As a control, glutathione Sepharose beads were prepared that were complexed with GST protein alone. The NS 1 protein was synthesized in vitro and labeled with 35S-methionine through coupled transcription translation reactions in reticulocyte lysates. The coated glutathione Sepharose beads were incubated with the radiolabeled NSl protein. The NSl protein was efficiently precipitated by the GST-NS 1-BP fusion protein, but not by GST (Fig. 19, lanes GST, GST- NS 1-BP). This result confirms the yeast two-hybrid data and shows that the viral NSl protein can also physically interact with the cellular NSl-BP.
8.2.4. NSl-BP IS CONCENTRATED IN INTRANUCLEAR
DOMAINS ENRICHED IN SPLICING FACTORS
Polyclonal rabbit antibodies were raised against recombinant NSl-BP and used to analyze the concentration and intracellular localization of NSl-BP in mammalian cells. Immunoblot analyses of the human epithelial-derived Hep-2, 293 and HeLa cell lines by NSl -BP-specific antibodies detected a protein doublet band with a molecular mass of about 70 kDa (Fig. 20). This is the predicted size for a protein derived from the NSl-BP open reading frame. Two minor protein bands migrating at 65 kDa and 50 kDa were stained at variable intensity and may correspond to NSl-BP break-down products. NSl-BP-specific antibodies were affinity-purified from immune semm and used for immunofluorescence analysis. In HeLa cells, a punctate nuclear staining pattern that excluded the nucleoli was observed (Fig. 21). In addition, a weak diffuse staining of the cytoplasm was reproducibly seen. The nuclear staining of NSl-BP was similar in appearance to the 'speckled' pattern that was obtained by immunofluorescence staining of cells with antibodies directed against factors involved in pre-mRNA splicing (Spector, et al., 1991, EMBO J. 10: 3467-3481). The speckle domains correspond ultrastructurally to interchromatin granules and perichromatin fibrils and are enriched in splicing snRNPs and non-snRNP splicing factors like SC35 and other SR proteins (reviewed by Spector, 1993, Annu. Rev. Cell Biol. 9: 265- 315). To determine how the NSl-BP localization relates to speckle domains HeLa cells were double immunostained with NSl-BP-specific antibodies and a monoclonal antibody raised against the spliceosome assembly factor SC35 which is a known component of speckle domains (Fu, et al., 1990, Nature 343: 437-441). Confocal laser scanning microscopy demonstrated that the dot-like nuclear NS 1 -BP signal colocalized with the SC35 signal (Fig. 22 A-C). The concentration of multiple proteins involved in pre-mRNA processing in these nuclear regions suggests an important role of this compartment for cellular RNA biogenesis (Singer, et al., 1997. Cell 91 : 291-294). The accumulation of NSl- BP in the same compartment suggests that NSl-BP may be a component of the cellular splicing machinery.
8.2.5. NSl-BP RELOCALIZES TO THE ENTIRE NUCLEOPLASM IN INFLUENZA A VIRUS-INFECTED CELLS
The viral NSl protein accumulates in the nucleus of cells infected with influenza A vims (Greenspan, et al., 1988, J. Virol. 62: 3020-3026; Young, et al., 1983, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 80: 6105). Hence, experiments were performed that examined whether the speckled nuclear localization of the cellular NSl -binding protein would be affected in virus- infected cells expressing the NS 1 protein. Influenza A virus-infected cells were double immunostained with antibodies directed against the NSl-BP and the viral NSl or the cellular SC35 protein, respectively (Fig. 22). As expected, the NSl protein localized predominantly to the nucleoplasm with some additional nucleolar signal (Fig. 22E). For the NSl-BP staining, a remarkable change was observed after infection by influenza vims. The cellular NSl-BP was no longer found concentrated in the nuclear speckles, but was instead distributed throughout the nucleoplasm. Its distribution pattern was similar to that of the viral NSl protein except that there was no nucleolar signal (Fig. 22D, F). This redistribution of NSl-BP was observed in a few cells as early as four hours post infection. With ongoing infection, most of the cells expressing the viral NSl protein had an NSl-BP staining pattern similar to the one shown in figure 22D. The intensity of the nuclear NSl-BP signal appeared to increase slightly in infected cells. However, no increase in the amount of NSl- BP in vims-infected cells by immunoblotting (data not shown) was detected. This suggests that NSl-BP epitopes are more easily accessible to antibodies in the nuclei of infected cells. The intranuclear relocalization of NSl-BP in infected cells raised the question of whether the distribution of other proteins that normally localize to speckles would also change. Gross redistribution of proteins might occur if speckles break down during influenza virus infection. However, the staining of virus-infected cells with anti-SC35 antibody at 10 hours post infection (Fig. 22H) showed only a small change of the normal pattern. The average size of the speckles appeared to be slightly decreased with a concomitant increase in the number of these domains. Essentially the same observation was made in a previous study that examined the distribution of splicing factors in influenza A vims-infected cells (Fortes, et al., 1995, J. Gen. Virol. 76: 1001-100). These findings suggest that the redistribution of NSl-BP to the nucleoplasm in infected cells is not merely a consequence of speckle disintegration. The cellular NSl-BP may therefore be relocalized 5 via the binding to the viral NS 1 protein. The intracellular relocalization is likely to have an impact on NSl-BP function in vims-infected cells.
8.2.6. A TRUNCATED NSl-BP PROTEIN INHIBITS PRE-mRNA SPLICING AT A STEP AFTER SPLICEOSOME ASSEMBLY
10 It has been demonstrated that the NS 1 protein can inhibit pre-mRNA splicing in vivo and in vitro (Fortes, et al., 1994, EMBO J. 13: 704-712; Lu, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8:1817-1828). The block in splicing was assigned to a step after the assembly of spliceosomes, but before the first catalytic event (Lu, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8:1817-1828). It was hypothesized that the binding of the NSl protein to a cellular protein(s) whose
15 function is essential for splicing, leads to the observed block in splicing. Given the intranuclear colocalization of the NSl -binding protein with well-known factors of the mRNA splicing apparatus, the role of NSl-BP in pre-mRNA splicing was analyzed through the use of in vitro splicing assays using HeLa cell nuclear extracts. A tmncated NSl-BP in form of a GST-NS 1-BP fusion protein was used as a potential dominant-negative inhibitor
20 of the endogenous NS 1 -BP. Such a strategy has previously been employed to examine a functional role of a protein in RNA splicing (Yuryev, et al., 1996, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93: 6975-6980).
The splicing of a 32P-labeled pre-mRNA in HeLa cell nuclear extracts was analyzed in the presence of GST-NS 1-BP, GST-NSl or control GST protein (Fig. 23). The formation
25 of heparin-resistant splicing complexes in the same reactions by native gel electrophoresis was also examined. In the control reaction, the intron lariat-exon2 splicing intermediate was easily detected after a one hour incubation. At the two hour time point the accumulation of spliced mRNA and the intron lariat was observed (Fig. 23 A, lanes NE). Native gel electrophoresis showed that both A- and B-type spliceosomes were formed normally at 20,
30 40 and 60 minutes with a higher proportion of radiolabeled mRNAs shifting into B complex bands at later time points (Fig. 23B, lanes NE). The A complex contains U2 snRNP and the B complex, which represents the fully assembled spliceosome, the U2, U4/U6 and US snRNPs (Konarska, et al., 1987, Cell 49: 763-774). The addition of GST protein to nuclear extract did not change the splicing of the pre-mRNA nor did it interfere with the assembly
35 of spliceosomes (Fig. 23A and B, lanes GST). However, no splicing intermediates or products accumulated in the presence of equimolar amounts of affinity-purified GST-NSl protein (Fig. 23 A, lanes GST-NSl). This effect was not due to a defect in spliceosome assembly, because both A- and B-type complexes assembled, although B bands formed at a slightly reduced rate (Fig. 23B, lanes GST-NSl). Interestingly, an almost identical result was obtained in splicing reactions complemented with the same concentration of purified GST-NS 1-BP. There were no splicing products detectable after one hour incubation and only trace amounts of the exon 1 and intron lariat-exon2 splicing intermediates were detected at the two hour time point (Fig. 23 A and B, lanes GST-NS 1-BP). The RNP gel analysis showed that the formation of B-type splicing complexes occurred in the presence of GST-NS 1 -BP (Fig. 23B, lanes GST-NS 1 -BP and GST-NSl). This result demonstrates that the tmncated NSl-BP protein blocks a cellular activity required for the first step of pre- mRNA splicing as does the viral NSl protein. The observed splicing inhibition by the tmncated NSl-BP is likely to be the result of a dominant-negative effect on the splicing function of the endogenous wild-type protein.
8.3. DISCUSSION The NS 1 is the only non-stmctural protein of influenza A vimses that is expressed in infected cells. Although the NSl protein has been implicated in several different processes including pre-mRNA splicing, mRNA transport and translation, little is known about specific cellular factors that are recognized by NS 1. Since NS 1 has pleiotropic effects, it may interact with a variety of proteins in infected cells thereby affecting different steps of cell metabolism. For example, NS 1 appears to be an auxiliary (vimlence) factor that plays a crucial role in inhibiting interferon-mediated antiviral responses of the host. Genetically engineered influenza A vims lacking the NSl gene show impaired ability to replicate in normal host cells with functional interferon-defense systems, but are able to replicate in interferon-deficient host cells. The role of NSl in the interferon-mediated response makes NSl /host cell protein interactions excellent targets for therapeutic intervention.
In order to identify such cellular proteins, the yeast interaction trap was used, as described supra, to screen a human cDNA expression library using a LexA-NSl fusion protein as bait. NSl -I (NS 1 -interactor) which is a cytoplasmic 55 kDa protein that binds to the divergent NS 1 proteins expressed by influenza A and B vimses has been previously characterized (Wolff, et al., 1996, J. Virol. 70: 5363-5372). NSl -I is derived from the precursor protein of a 17β-estradiol dehydrogenase and its binding to NSl may have a function in modulating steroid hormone levels in virus-infected cells (Wolff, et al., 1996. J. Virol. 70: 5363-5372). This example demonstrates the identification of the NSl-binding protein, NSl-BP, through its specific interaction with the NSl protein. This interaction was confirmed by the use of an in vitro binding assay. The NS 1 protein co-precipitated with a GST-NS 1 -BP fusion protein, but not with GST alone demonstrating that NS 1 also physically binds to NSl-BP. The analysis of the primary stmcture of the NSl-BP identified two regions with considerable homology to known proteins. The amino-terminal 120 amino acids of NSl- BP are homologous to the BTB/POZ domain originally identified in a group of proteins that primarily regulate transcription (Bardwell, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8: 1664-1677; Zollmann, et al., 1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91 : 10717-10721). This includes the human proto-oncogenes LAZ3/BCL6 and PLZF and the Drosophila Tramtrack, GAGA and Broad Complex proteins (for a review, see Albagli, et al., 1995, Cell Growth Diff. 6:1193- 1198). It has been shown that the isolated BTB/POZ domains of brie a brae (bab), ZID, LAZ3/BCL6 and Kelch can mediate homo- and/or heterodimerization suggesting that BTB/POZ domains are a conserved protein-protein interaction motif (Bardwell, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8: 1664-1677; Chen, et al., 1995, Mol. Cell. Biol. 15: 3424-3429; Dhordain, et al., 1995, Oncogene 11 : 2689-2697; Dong, et al., 1996, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 93: 3624- 3629; Robinson, et al., 1997, J. Cell. Biol. 138: 799-810). In the case of the bab protein, the first 51 amino acids of the BTB/POZ domain were found to be sufficient for dimerization (Chen, et al., 1995, Mol. Cell. Biol. 15: 3424-3429). Another function of this module may be protein targeting to specific nuclear domains, since the appearance of ZID, LAZ3/BCL6 and hZF5 proteins in 'nuclear dots' depended on the integrity of their BTB/POZ domains (Bardwell, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8: 1664-1677; Chen, et al., 1995, Mol. Cell. Biol. 15: 3424-3429; Dhordain, et al., 1995, Oncogene 11 : 2689-2697; Dong, et al., 1996, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 93: 3624-3629; Sugiura, et al., 1997, Biochem. Biophys. Acta 1352: 23-26). The human cDNA isolated through the interaction trap encoded amino acids 347 to
619 of NSl-BP, which suggests that this region contains the binding site for the NSl protein. This part of the NSl-BP almost entirely consists of five imperfect repeats of 47-49 amino acids that are homologous to the kelch repeat motif (Bork, et al., 1994, J. Mol. Biol. 236: 1277-1282). Based on phylogenetic sequence comparisons it was suggested that kelch repeats take on a conserved three-dimensional fold that was previously identified in procaryotic and eucaryotic enzymes (Bork, et al., 1994, J. Mol. Biol. 236: 1277-1282). A high resolution x-ray diffraction analysis for one of these enzymes, galactose oxidase of D. dendroides, revealed that each repeat element folds into a blade-like domain of four- stranded antiparallel β sheets. The blade-like domains are circularly arranged resulting in a β propeller stmcture (Ito, et al., 1991, Nature 350: 87-90). The sequence homology suggests that the five repeats of NSl-BP may also adopt a similar three-dimensional fold.
In spite of the conservation on the sequence level, kelch repeats appear to have diverged functions in the homologous proteins. In galactose oxidase of D. dendroides, the kelch repeat fold contains the catalytic center of the enzyme (Ito, et al., 1991, Nature 350: 87-90). On the other hand, the kelch elements of the β-scmin protein of L. polyphemus have been shown to bind to actin which lead to the proposal, that kelch repeats may constitute an actin-binding domain (Schmid, et al., 1994, J. Cell. Biol. 124: 341-350; Way, et al., 1995, J. Cell Biol. 128: 51-60). However, other proteins that contain kelch repeats like the α-scmin or the calicin proteins were localized to intracellular regions that appear to be devoid of actin (von Bϋlow, et al., 1995, Exp. Cell. Res. 219: 407-413; Way, et al., 1995, J. Cell Sci. 108: 3155-3162).
The proteins encoded by different poxvimses that are homologous to NS 1 -BP have not been studied. The genes of the vaccinia virus A55R, C2L and F3L ORF products could be deleted without affecting viral replication in tissue culture and are therefore considered to be non-essential (Kotwal, et al., 1988, Virology 167: 524-537; Perkus, et al., 1991, Virology 180: 406-410). However, the presence of homologous proteins in different poxvimses argues for important roles of these proteins. For example, these gene products may increase vims vimlence or otherwise play a role in infected animals. By immunolocalization studies described in this example demonstrate that the NSl-
BP is concentrated in discrete regions in the nucleus of non- infected cells. This intracellular distribution is compatible with a function of the NSl-BP in gene regulation. Confocal double-immunostaining analyses of cells has previously demonstrated that the NSl-BP co- localizes in a speckled pattern with the spliceosome assembly factor SC35 (Fu, et al., 1990, Nature 343: 437-441). Several immunolocalization studies have shown that a number of other factors involved in pre-mRNA splicing, among them the spliceosomal snRNPs, also accumulate in the 20 to 50 irregularly shaped SC35 domains termed 'speckles' (reviewed by Spector, D. L. 1993. Annu. Rev. Cell Biol. 9: 265-315). As shown by electron microscopic analysis, the speckle domains correspond to interchromatin granules and perichromatin fibrils (Fakan, 1994, Trends Cell Biol. 4: 86-90; Spector, et al., 1991, EMBO J. 10: 3467- 3481). Different conclusions have been drawn about the functional significance of the accumulation of splicing factors in specific subnuclear compartments. Since speckle domains localize near genes that are transcribed and spliced, it was suggested that speckles constitute a compartment in which pre-mRNA is actively spliced (Xing, et al., 1995, J. Cell Biol. 6:1635-1647). However, nascent RNA polymerase II transcripts were detected by Br- UTP labeling in a random distribution throughout the nucleoplasm (Fay, et al., 1997, Exp. Cell Res. 231: 27-37). Since splicing is thought to occur co-transcriptionally it was concluded by this group that pre-mRNA is processed throughout the nucleoplasm. For the speckle domains, a role as a storage or recycling compartment that supplies splicing factors
5 to transcription sites was also proposed (reviewed by Singer, et al., 1997, Cell 91 : 291-294). In any case, the important role of speckle domains for cellular RNA biogenesis is emphasized by their dynamic appearance in response to alterations of cellular gene expression. Stress conditions like heat shock that result in inhibition of RNA splicing also induce apparent changes in the distribution of splicing factors (Bond, 1988, EMBO 7: 3509-
10 3518; Spector, et al., 1991, EMBO J. 10: 3467-3481). The localization of the NSl-BP in nuclear regions that contain high concentrations of pre-mRNA splicing factors suggests a role for the NSl-BP in mRNA splicing.
The intranuclear localization of the NSl-BP was drastically altered in influenza A vims-infected cells that expressed the NSl protein. The speckled pattern was replaced by a
15 rather homogenous distribution of NS 1 -BP throughout the nucleoplasm in a fashion similar to that observed for the viral NS 1 protein. In contrast, only subtle changes were detected in the appearance of the SC35 protein in influenza A virus-infected cells. The relocalization of the NS 1 -BP is therefore apparently a specific effect and not the result of a disintegration of the SC35-enriched domains. This idea is further supported by observations that stress 0 conditions like heat-shock, semm starvation or the addition of actinomycin D which inhibits RNA polymerase II transcription, did not dismpt the colocalization of NSl-BP with SC35. Local changes in NSl-BP concentration in response to an influenza A vims infection may also influence its function.
The NSl protein has previously been shown to inhibit pre-mRNA splicing in vitro 5 and in vivo (Fortes, et al., 1994, EMBO J. 13: 704-712; Lu, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8:1817- 1828). It was speculated that the inhibition of splicing would result in the retention of pre- mRNA in the nucleus of infected cells thereby increasing the concentration of mRNA cap stmctures available for cap-snatching by the viral RNA polymerase (Lu, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8:1817-1828). Alternatively, the activity of the NSl protein may contribute to the 0 observed regulated splicing of the viral mRNAs derived from segments 7 and 8 (Smith, et al., 1985, EMBO J. 4: 2313-2319; Valcarel, et al., 1991, J. Gen. Virol. 72: 1301-1308). Because the cellular NSl-BP is concentrated in nuclear regions enriched in pre-mRNA splicing factors and it relocalizes in virus-infected cells, the role of NSl-BP in pre-mRNA splicing in vitro examined. A tmncated NSl-BP was used as a potential non-functional 5 competitor of the endogenous protein in HeLa cell nuclear extract and the effects of this probe were compared to the known inhibition of pre-mRNA splicing by the NSl protein. A similar experimental design has been used before by others to examine the role of the large subunit of RNA polymerase II in pre-mRNA splicing (Du, et al., 1997, J. Cell Biol. 136: 5- 18; Yuryev, A., et al., 1996. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93: 6975-6980). This example
5 demonstrates that the tmncated NS 1 -BP blocks the splicing of a 32P-labeled pre-mRNA in HeLa cell nuclear extracts at the same step as does the NS 1 protein. Splicing complexes formed at only slightly reduced rates in the presence of each of the two proteins. However, the conversion of the pre-mRNA into splicing intermediates or products was highly reduced. This finding suggests that both proteins act on the same stage of the spliceosome
10 pathway, /. e. , they block an activity required for the first catalytic step. The shortened NS 1 - BP that was used lacks the 346 N-terminal amino acids of the wild-type protein and was fused to the 26 kDa GST protein. This mutant NSl-BP protein is therefore unlikely to retain the full activity of the wild-type protein. However, the tmncated NSl-BP may still be able to interact with other essential splicing factors thereby preventing their association with the
15 wild-type NS 1 -BP. These results are compatible with a role of the wild-type NS 1 -BP in pre- mRNA splicing.
In normal cells, NS 1 -BP is concentrated in intranuclear domains that are enriched with multiple splicing factors. This example demonstrates that the cellular NS 1 -BP is specifically relocalized in influenza A virus-infected cells that express the NS 1 protein.
20 Redistribution of NSl-BP is likely to alter its function or activity. The influenza A vims may thus inhibit host cell splicing in infected cells by the association of the viral NSl protein with the cellular NSl-BP. The NSl protein may either downregulate NSl-BP activity directly by blocking its normal association with spliceosomes. Alternatively, a mechanism can be envisioned, in which the viral NSl protein removes the cellular NSl-BP
25 from centers of active splicing thereby lowering its availability for participation in cellular mRNA splicing processes. In both models, the relocalization of NSl-BP may reflect its dismpted function. It has previously been suggested that the NS 1 protein inhibits splicing by binding to U6 snRNA (Lu, et al., 1994, Genes Dev. 8:1817-1828; Qiu, et al., 1995, RNA 1 : 304-316) which is a key component of the catalytic core within the spliceosome (Guthrie,
30 1991, Science 253: 157-163; Sharp, 1994, Cell 77: 805-815). The apparent inhibition of splicing by the NSl protein through the binding to NSl-BP does not exclude an NS1-U6 interaction. It is estimated that at least 80-100 different factors are involved in pre-mRNA splicing (Green, 1991, Annu. Rev. Cell Biol. 7: 559-599; Sharp, 1994, Cell 77: 805-815). For that reason it has been difficult to dissect their dynamic and complex interactions during
35 the assembly of a spliceosome and the catalysis of the splicing reaction. It is possible that interactions of the NSl protein with both NSl-BP and U6 snRNA contribute to the inhibition of pre-mRNA splicing.
Like the influenza A vims NSl protein, the essential ICP27 protein of herpes simplex vims type 1 (HSV-1) has been implicated in impairing cellular pre-mRNA splicing,
5 possibly as part of a host cell shut-off mechanism (Hardy, et al., 1994, J. Virol. 68: 7790- 7799). There appear to be parallels between lytic infections by influenza A vims and HSV- 1. Similarly as shown for the NSl protein, the ICP27 protein has been found to have pleiotropic regulatory effects. Roles for ICP27 in mRNA 3'-end processing (Brown, et al., 1995, J. Virol. 69: 7187-7195; McLauchlan, et al., 1992, J. Virol. 66: 6939-6945) and in
10 mRNA export (Phelan, et al., 1997, J. Gen. Virol. 78: 3327-3331; Soliman, T. M., et al., 1997. J. Virol. 71 : 9188-9197) were suggested in addition to an inhibitory effect on pre- mRNA splicing. Furthermore, the expression of ICP27 induces the redistribution of SC35 and spliceosomal snRNPs from the known speckled pattern to few condensed intranuclear stmctures in which they colocalize with the ICP27 protein (Phelan, et al., 1993, Proc. Natl.
15 Acad. Sci. USA 90: 9056-9060; Sandri-Goldin, et al., 1995, J. Virol. 69: 6063-6076). This pattern is basically the opposite to the situation observed in influenza A vims-infected cells. In this example, the number of SC35 domains appears to increase with a concomitant decrease in size (Fortes, et al., 1995, J. Gen. Virol. 76: 1001-1007) (this study) and in contrast to ICP27, the NS 1 protein is localized throughout the nucleus in a diffuse pattern.
20
9. EXAMPLE: A PROLINE-RICH MOTIF WITHIN THE MATRIX PROTEIN OF RHABDOVIRUSES INTERACTS WITH CELLULAR WW- DOMAINS AND FUNCTIONS IN BUDDING
The matrix (M) protein of rhabdovimses plays a key role in viral assembly and ~r budding, however the precise mechanism by which M mediates these processes remains unclear. A highly conserved, proline-rich motif (PPxY or PY motif; where P-proline, Y~ tyrosine and x-any amino acid) of rhabdoviral M proteins was found to be associated with a functional role in budding mediated by the M protein. Point mutations that dismpt the PY motif of the M protein of vesicular stomatitis vims (VSV) had no obvious effect on -r. membrane localization of M, but instead lead to a decrease in the amount of M protein released from cells in a functional budding assay. Interestingly, the PPxY sequence within rhabdoviral M proteins was identical to that of the ligand which interacts with WW domains of cellular proteins. Indeed, far- western blotting demonstrated that the PY motifs of both VSV (PPPY) and rabies vims (PPEY) M proteins can interact specifically with WW ~c domains of cellular proteins. Moreover, point mutations that dismpt the consensus PY motif of VSV or rabies vims M protein resulted in a significant decrease in their ability to bind to cellular WW domains. These properties of the PY motif of rhabdovims M proteins are strikingly analogous to those of the late (L) budding domain identified in the gαg-specific protein p2b of Rous sarcoma vims (RSV). The results of the following example indicate that rhabdovimses usurp host proteins to facilitate the budding process, and that M- mediated budding of rhabdovimses and gαg-mediated budding of retrovimses have features in common.
This example demonstrates that a highly conserved PPxY motif at the amino termini of several rhabdoviral M proteins is important for viral budding. The PPxY motifs of both VSV and rabies vims M proteins were shown to interact specifically with WW domains of cellular proteins, including YAP. Mutations that dismpted the viral PPxY motifs of VSV and rabies vims M proteins also dismpted their ability to interact with WW domains. Lastly, the PPxY motif of VSV M was shown to be important for the release of M protein from cells in a functional budding assay. Taken together, these results demonstrate that the M proteins of rhabdovimses possess a proline-rich budding domain similar to the L domain found in the gag proteins of retrovimses, and that the budding domain of M may mediate its function through interactions with selected host proteins.
9.1. MATERIALS AND METHODS
9.1.1. CELLS AND VIRUSES
Stocks of CV-1 and BHK-21 cells were maintained in Dulbecco's Minimal Essential Medium (DMEM; Life Technologies) supplemented with 10 fetal calf semm (Hyclone). Vesicular stomatitis vims (Indiana serotype) was propagated in BHK-21 cells.
9.1.2. PLASMIDS
The M gene of VSV (Indiana serotype) was cloned by RT-PCR using primers flanking the open reading frame and containing an EcoRV(5') and Xbal (3') restriction endonuclease sites. The PCR product was inserted into the EcoRV/Xbal-digested pSP72 vector containing the bacteriophage T7 promoter (Promega) using standard protocols (Ausubel, et al., 1992, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley and Sons, New York). Briefly, total RNA was isolated from BHK-21 cells infected with VSV using the TRIzol reagent and protocol of the manufacturer (Life Technologies). Reverse-transcription was performed using AMV reverse transcriptase (Life Technologies), and PCR was performed using standard protocols with Vent DNA polymerase (New England Biolabs). PCR fragments encoding amino acids 1-74 of VSV M, 1-202, 1-69, and 1-52 of rabies M were inserted into the BamHI and EcoRI restriction sites of the vector pGEX-2TK (Pharmacia) for expression of gst fusion proteins. Oligonucleotide primers and standard PCR protocols were utilized to introduce point mutations within the PPxY motifs of VSV and rabies vims gst-M fusion proteins. All plasmids and introduced mutations were confirmed by restriction endonuclease digestion and DNA sequencing by the Sanger method (Sanger, et al., 1977, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 74, 5463-5467.). Plasmid DNAs were maintained in either E. coli strain DH5alpha (Life Technologies) or strain SURE2 (Stratagene), and DNA was purified using the Qiagen purification system (Qiagen Inc.).
9.1.3. PURIFICATION OF M PROTEIN FROM VSV VIRIONS Briefly, the supernatant was harvested from VSV infected BHK-21 cells at 36 hour post-infection and clarified first at 2500 rpm for 10 min., and then at 3200 rpm for 10 min. The supernatant was then centrifuged at 36,000 rpm for 30 min. in an SW41 rotor. The virion pellet was then suspended in 400 μl of buffer containing 10 mM Tris pH=8.0, 0.25 M NaCI, 1.0 Triton-XlOO, and 0.2 mg/ml DTT and incubated at room temperature for 30 min. The sample was then centrifuged at 75,000 rpm for 2 hours in a TL-100 ultracentrifuge (Beckman). The supernatant fraction (S) was removed and stored at -70° C, while the pellet fraction (P) was suspended in 400 μl of the above buffer and then stored at -70° C.
9.1.4. PURIFICATION AND RADIOLABELING OF GST FUSION PROTEINS
All gst fusion proteins were expressed from the plasmid pGEX-2TK in E. coli SURE2 cells using the gst Gene Fusion System and the protocols of the manufacturer (Pharmacia). The labeling of the fusion proteins with 32P-gamma ATP (6000Ci/mmol; NEN Dupont) and far-westem blotting were as described previously (Kaelin, et al., 1992, Cell, 70, 351-364, Chen and Sudol, 1995, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 92, 7819-7823).
9.1.5. BUDDING ASSAY The budding assay was essentially performed as described in Justice, et al., 1995, J. Virol., 69, 3156-3160. Briefly, 35mm dishes of CV-1 cells were infected with VvT7 (generously provided by B. Moss, National Institutes of Health), and then transfected with the appropriate plasmid using the DOTAP reagent (Boehringer Mannheim Corporation). At 2 hours post-transfection the cells were metabolically labeled with 150μCi of 5SMet-Cys (NEN Dupont), and the cells and media were harvested at various times post-transfection. Cells were lysed in RIPA buffer (50mM Tris pH=8.0, 150mM NaCI, 1.0 NP-40, 0.5 deoxycholate, 0.1 SDS), while 900μl of media was added to 100 μl of 10X NTE buffer (0.5M Tris-HCI pH=7.5, 1.5M NaCI, 1.0 NP-40, lOmM EDTA, 2.5 gelatin, and 0.2M sodium azide). Immunoprecipitation of both cells and media were performed using polyclonal antiserum directed against VSV M. Protein samples were fractionated by SDS- PAGE and visualized by autoradiography.
9.1.6. INDIRECT IMMUNOFLUORESCENCE Sub-cellular localization of the VSV M protein was accomplished by indirect immunofluorescence. CV-1 cells expressing the M protein of VSV were fixed and permeabilized for 15 minutes in 2.5 formaldehyde/0.5 Triton X-100/PBS. The primary antibody was polyclonal anti-VSV M, while the secondary antibody was affinity purified goat-anti-rabbit conjugated to FITC (Boehringer Mannheim Corporation). Positive cells were visualized with the use of a Leica CLSM confocal microscope.
9.2. RESULTS
9.2.1. CONSERVATION OF THE PY MOTIF IN THE M PROTEIN OF RHABDOVIRUSES
A globular domain that mediates protein-protein interactions was identified recently and shown to be present in a wide range of cellular proteins involved in signal transduction, gene regulation, and cytoskeletal formation (Sudol, 1996, In Blundell, et al., (eds.), Prog. Biophys. Molec. Biol, Vol. 65, Elsevier Science Ltd., Great Britain, pp. 113-132). This domain, termed WW domain, is about 38-40 amino acids long and contains a number of conserved amino acids including two highly conserved tryptophans spaced 20-22 amino acids apart (Sudol, 1996, In Blundell, et al., (eds.), Prog. Biophys. Molec. Biol, Vol. 65, Elsevier Science Ltd., Great Britain, pp. 113-132). The WW domain was shown to interact with a polyproline ligand having the core consensus sequence PPxY (Chen, et al., 1997, J. Biol. Chem., 272, 17070-17077; Einbond and Sudol, 1996, FEBS Lett, 384, 1-8). Of interest to us, is that this PPxY motif is highly conserved in the M proteins of various rhabdovimses (Table III, below; Gill and Banerjee, 1986, Virology, 150, 308-312; Kiuchi and Roy, 1984, Virology, 134, 238-243; Rayssiguier, et al., 1986, Virus Res., 5, 177-190; Rose and Gallione, 1981, J. Virol., 39, 519-528). Not only is the primary sequence conserved, but also the relative location within the N-termini of these M proteins is maintained (Table III, below). In addition to the rhabdoviruses, the putative matrix proteins (VP40) of both Ebola and Marburg vimses (filovimses that were initially classified as rhabdovimses) also contain the PPxY motif at their amino termini (Table III, below; Bukreyev, et al., 1995, Arch. Virol., 140, 1589-1600; Sanchez, et al., 1993, Vims Res., 29, 215-240). The highly conserved nature of the sequence and topology of the PPxY motif within these viral stmctural proteins implies an importance perhaps in the stmcture and/or function of these proteins.
9.2.2. VSV M PROTEIN INTERACTS WITH CELLULAR WW DOMAINS 7N VITRO Since the highly conserved PY motif present within rhabdoviral M proteins is identical to the sequence of the ligand which interacts with WW domains, it was determined whether the M protein of VSV could interact with WW domains of cellular proteins in a far-western blotting assay. To isolate the M protein from VSV virions, BHK- 21 cells were infected with VSV, and progeny virions were purified from the supernatant as described (see Section 9.1 Materials and Methods). The virion preparation was divided into pellet (P) and soluble (S) fractions, and the viral proteins present within each fraction were analyzed by SDS-PAGE and visualized by staining with coomassie brilliant blue (Fig. 24A). As expected, the soluble fraction contained predominantly the two viral envelope-associated proteins G (glycoprotein) and M, while the pellet fraction contained the viral nucleocapsid (Ν) protein in addition to G and M (Fig. 24 A). In addition to the soluble fraction of purified virions (VR), cell extracts from mock- infected (m) or VSV infected (V) BHK-21 cells were probed with 32P-labeled glutathione-S-transferase alone (gst), or a fusion protein consisting of gst and WW domain 1 (gstYAPWWl) from the mouse YAP (Fig. 24B). Following a 12 hour exposure of the film, the M protein (at approximately 30 kD molecular mass) from purified virions interacted strongly with gstYAPWWl , but not with gst alone (Fig. 24B, lanes VR). A longer exposure of the filter (Fig. 24C) demonstrated that the VSV M protein from infected cell extracts also interacted with the gstYAPWWl probe (Fig. 24C, lane V), but not with gst alone (data not shown). A protein of 30 kD was not detected in the mock- infected cell extract (Fig. 24C, lane m). Instead, a protein of approximately 38 kD was observed in the mock-infected cell extract probed with gstYAPWWl (Fig. 24C, lane m). The presence of this cellular protein was not unexpected, since it has been described previously as WBP-2; a cellular protein of unknown function that interacts with the WW domain of YAP (Chen and Sudol, 1995, Proc. Νatl. Acad. Sci. USA, 92, 7819-7823). Interestingly, WBP-2 was not observed in the VSV-infected cell extract (Fig. 24C, lane V). WBP-2 was also not detected when probed with gst alone (data not shown). These data indicate that full-length M protein from VSV virions and VSV-infected cell extracts can interact with the WW domain of a cellular protein.
9.2.3. THE N-TERMINUS OF VSV M IS SUFFICIENT FOR
INTERACTING WITH CELLULAR WW DOMAINS
To determine whether the N-terminus of VSV M containing the PPxY motif was sufficient to mediate the interaction with the WW domains of YAP, the full-length M gene of VSV was first cloned by RT-PCR. Several plasmids were then constmcted to express the N-terminal 74 amino acids of VSV M fused to the gst moiety (Fig. 25). The PPxY motif, which begins at amino acid position 24, was unmodified in plasmid gstVSVM74WT (Fig. 25). However, in plasmids gstVSVM74P-A and gstVSVM74Y-A proline (P) 24 was changed to alanine (A) and tyrosine (Y) 27 was changed to (A), respectively (Fig. 25). The gstVSVM74WT protein was expressed in E. coli grown under inducing (IN) conditions (Fig. 26A). Equivalent amounts of induced or uninduced bacterial extracts were immobilized onto nitrocellulose filters and probed with gstYAPWW2 (Fig. 26B, lanes 2 and 3), gstYAPWWl (lanes 4 and 5), or gst alone (lanes 6 and 7). The gstVSVM74WT fusion protein interacted with both WW domains 1 and 2 from the mouse YAP, however a reproducibly stronger interaction was observed with WW domain 1 (Fig. 26B, compare lanes 2 and 4). A similar preference for WW domain 1 was also observed when full-length M protein from purified virions and VSV-infected cells extracts were assayed by far- western analysis. The gstVSVM74WT fusion protein did not interact with gst alone (Fig. 26B, lane 6).
To further confirm that the PY motif present within the N-terminal 74 amino acids of VSV M was responsible for this interaction, the fusion proteins containing point mutations within the PY motif were used in a similar far- western blotting assay. Mutations of the first P or Y in PPxY to alanine have been shown to result in a decrease in the efficiency of binding to WW domains (Chen and Sudol, 1995, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 92, 7819- 7823; Chen, et al., 1997, J. Biol. Chem., 272, 17070-17077). The wild type and mutant gst fusion proteins were expressed to equivalent levels in E. coli (Fig. 27 A) and probed with gstYAPWW2 (Fig. 27B). As expected, WW domain 2 of YAP interacted with the gstVSVM74WT protein (Fig. 27B, lane 1), however the ability of WW domain 2 of YAP to interact with either of the point mutants was reduced by 90 (Fig. 27B, lanes 2 and 3). The gstYAPWW2 probe did not interact with gst alone, and the gst probe did not interact with the wild type or mutant gstVSVM74 fusion proteins (data not shown). These data demonstrate that the N-terminal 74 amino acids of VSV M are sufficient for interacting with WW domains of YAP, and that the viral PPxY motif can serve as the core ligand for this cellular protein domain.
5 9.2.4. RABIES VIRUS M PROTEIN INTERACTS WITH
CELLULAR WW DOMAINS IN VITRO
To determine whether a second rhabdoviral M protein (with limited overall sequence identity to M protein of VSV) could interact with WW domains, the full-length rabies vims M protein or various C-terminal tmncations of rabies M were fused to gst (Fig. 28). The
10 fusion protein gstRabM52Y-A is identical to gstRabM52WT except for a single point mutation in the PY motif of the rabies M protein which changes the tyrosine to an alanine (Fig. 28). All four gstRabM fusion proteins were expressed in E. coli grown under inducing conditions and used in far-westem blotting assays (Fig. 29). Duplicate filters containing gstRabM202 and gstRabM69 were probed with either gst alone, or gstYAPWW2 (Fig.
15 29A). Both gstRabM202 and gstRabM69 fusion proteins interacted with the gstYAPWW2 probe (Fig. 29A, lanes 3 and 4), but not with gst alone (Fig. 29A, lanes 1 and 2). Identical amounts of gstRabM52WT and gstRabM52Y-A fusion proteins (as shown in Fig. 29B) were also probed with either gst alone, or gstYAPWW2 (Fig. 29C). The gstRabM52WT fusion protein interacted with gstYAPWW2 (Fig. 29C, lane 4), but not with gst alone (lane 0 2). In contrast, a single point mutation within the PPxY motif in protein gstRabM52Y-A completely abolished the interaction with the YAP WW domain (Fig. 29C, lane 3).
To examine further the rabies M protein and WW domain interaction, the rabies fusion proteins were now purified, quantitated, and labeled as probes against a panel of gstWW domain fusion proteins (Fig. 30). In addition to gst alone, equivalent amounts (as 5 shown in Fig. 30C) of gstYAPWWl, gst YAP WW2, gstDystrophinWW, gstNedd4WW2, gstNedd4WW3, and gstFE65WW fusion proteins were probed with either gstRabM52WT (Fig. 30A), or gstRabM52Y-A (Fig. 30B). As expected, gstRabM52WT interacted with WW domain 2 and WW domain 1 (upon longer exposure of the filter) of YAP (Fig. 30A). Interestingly, gstRabM52WT also interacted strongly with WW domain 2 from the Nedd4 0 protein (Fig. 30A). The gstRabM52WT protein did not interact with the remaining gstWW domains fusion proteins demonstrating that there is specificity in this protein- protein interaction. Once again, the interactions between the rabies M protein and the various WW domains observed (Fig. 30A) were completely abolished by the introduction of a single point mutation in the PPxY motif in the gstRab52MY-A protein (Fig. 30B). 5 9.2.5. THE PY MOTIF OF VSV M FACILITATES BUDDING A functional budding assay for VSV M has been described previously Justice, et al., 1995, J. Virol., 69, 3156-3160. This assay was utilized to determine whether the PPxY motif of VSV M protein is important in M-mediated budding. CV-1 cells were first infected with the recombinant vaccinia vims (VvT7) expressing the bacteriophage T7 polymerase, and then transfected with plasmid pT7VSVMWT (expressing full-length, wild type M protein), plasmid pT7VSVMY-A (identical to wild type M except for a single point mutation within the PY motif changing tyrosine to alanine), or no DNA (mock-transfected). Both the cells and media were harvested and subjected to immunoprecipitation using polyclonal anti-VSV M antisemm (Fig. 31). Identical amounts of both wild type and mutant VSV M proteins were observed in the cell lysates (Fig. 31 A, lanes 3 and 4), while no M protein was detected in mock-transfected cells (Fig. 31 A, lane 2). In contrast, the amount of the mutant M protein (Fig. 3 IB, lane 3) released into the media by budding was reduced reproducibly by about 70% as compared to the amount of wild type VSV M protein in the media (Fig. 3 IB, lane 2). Thus, a single point mutation within the PPxY motif of VSV M resulted in a significant decrease in budding efficiency.
To determine whether the defect in budding of the mutant M protein was due to an inability to localize to the cell membrane, indirect immunofluorescence and confocal microscopy were performed on cells transfected with either the wild type or mutant M protein (Fig. 32). Transfected cells were examined at 5, 8, and 10 hours post-transfection (data not shown for 5 and 10 hour time points). For all time points tested, both the wild type and mutant M proteins localized to the cytoplasmic membrane equally well (Fig. 32). These data indicate that the defect in budding of the mutant M protein is not simply due to mislocalization within the cell, but rather to a defect in a later stage of the budding process.
9.3. DISCUSSION Much progress has been made in studying the assembly and budding pathways of negative-sense RNA vimses in general, however many questions remain concerning the role of both viral and host proteins in these late stages of the viral life-cycle. With respect to rhabdoviral assembly and egress, the results described in Section 9.2, above, demonstrates that: (i) A highly conserved PPxY motif within the M protein of VSV and rabies virus can function as a ligand that interacts in vitro with WW domains of cellular proteins, and (ii) This same PPxY motif of VSV M protein is functionally important for the budding process. Taken together, these findings indicate that rhabdoviral budding mediated by the M protein is facilitated by viral-host interactions. The polyproline ligand that interacts with the WW domain has been identified and well characterized as having the core consensus sequence PPxY. While the M protein of many rhabdovimses maintain the PPxY motif at their amino-termini (Table III), it should be noted that the M proteins from several rhabdovimses offish possess a PPxH (H-histidine)
5 motif rather than PPxY (Benmansour, et al., 1994, Virology, 198, 602-612). Although the aromatic nature of the amino acid position occupied by H rather than Y is maintained, this PPxH motif may also interact with either WW domains, or perhaps a WW-like domain. WW domains from YAP and the Nedd4 protein interacted strongly and specifically with the PPxY motifs of both VSV and rabies vims M proteins, whereas WW domains from other
10 cellular proteins (dystrophin, FE65, and ESS 1) did not interact with either viral protein (Fig. 30 and data not shown). Single point mutations within the PPxY motifs of VSV M protein and rabies vims M protein were sufficient to either significantly reduce, or abolish interactions with cellular WW domains. Both the WW domains of YAP and of the Nedd4 protein were able to interact with the viral M proteins, and both YAP and Nedd4 can be
15 found on the inner side of the plasma membrane, indicating that these cellular proteins represent authentic, in vivo targets for interacting with the rhabdoviral M protein. Both the WW domain and the related SH3 domain have been implicated in mediating vims-host protein-protein interactions. The Nef protein of HIV- 1 for example possesses a polyproline ligand which has been shown to interact with Src-family SH3
20 domains of cellular proteins and to be important for optimal viral replication (Lee, et al., 1995, EMBO J., 14, 5006-5015; Lee, et al., 1996, Cell, 85, 931-942). The LMP2 protein of Epstein-Barr vims (EBV) contains two polyproline motifs that have been postulated to mediate an interaction between LMP2 and the Src-family tyrosine kinases, FYN and LYN (Longnecker, et al., 1991, J. Virol., 65, 3681-3692). Lastly, of particular interest to us, the
25 PPxY motif is highly conserved in the gag proteins of many animal and human retrovimses (Wills, et al., 1994, J. Virol., 68, 6605-6618). One of the better characterized gag proteins in terms of functional domains important for gag-mediated budding, is that of Rous sarcoma vims (Bennett, et al., 1991, J. Virol., 65, 272-280; Bennett, et al., 1993, J. Virol., 67, 6487- 6498; Craven, et al., 1993, J. Virol., 67, 6246-6252; Weldon, et al., 1990, J. Virol., 64,
30 4169-4179; Weldon, et al., 1993, J. Virol., 67, 5550-5561; Wills and Craven, 1991, AIDS, 5, 639-654; Wills, et al., 1991, J. Virol., 65, 3804-3812; Wills, et al., 1994, J. Virol., 68, 6605-6618). Elegant studies have demonstrated that the PPxY motif present within the p2b protein of RSV gag not only interacts with WW domains in vitro, but also functions as a late budding domain (L domain) which is essential for a late stage in retroviral assembly
35 and release (Gamier, et al., 1996, Nature, 381, 744-745; Wills, et al., 1994, J. Virol., 68, 6605-6618). RSV gag proteins having mutations in the PPxY motif, or those deleted in this motif are defective in budding. Late budding domains have been identified in gag proteins of human immunodeficiency vims HIV-1 and equine infectious anemia vims, and have been implicated in mediating interactions with host proteins (Gottlinger, et al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA., 88, 3195-3199; Huang, et al., 1995, J. Virol., 69, 6810-6818; Puffer, et al., 1997, J. Virol., 71, 6541-6546). For example, Tyr Xaa Xaa Leu is apparently the "budding motif in the gag p° protein of the equine infectious anemia vims. (Puffer, et al., 1997, J. Virol., 71, 6541-6546). A similar motif in the influenza vims Ml protein is Tyr Xaa Xaa Leu (aa 100-103).
10 Thus, for the PPxY-containing gag proteins, it has been postulated that cellular proteins containing WW domains may play a role in the maturation and budding of these retrovimses (Gamier, et al., 1996, Nature, 381, 744-745). Our findings with the M protein of rhabdovimses parallel those of RSV gag in that the PPxY motif of VSV M can also interact with WW domains and appears to be important in the budding process (Figs. 31 and
15 32). These data provide further evidence that the M protein of rhabdovimses and the gag protein of retrovimses are in many ways functionally equivalent. Indeed, the N-terminal 74 amino acids of VSV M protein containing the PPxY motif are capable of functionally replacing the L-domain of the p2b protein of RSV in a functional retroviral budding assay. Moreover, point mutations that altered the PPxY motif of VSV M in these chimeric M-gag 0 proteins resulted in a protein that was defective in budding. Results from the initial immunofluorescence analyses (Fig. 32) lend support to the idea that the PPxY motif of VSV M protein is not required for membrane localization, but rather appears to be required for a later step in the budding pathway. Thus, the PPxY motif of the VSV M protein likely functions as a rhabdoviral late budding domain. 5 Should the PPxY-WW domain interaction prove to be a crucial interaction between the vims and host in vivo, then this vims-host interaction could serve as a potential target for antiviral agents designed to dismpt or block this step of viral assembly and release. Since the WW domain and the core motif of its ligand are relatively short, one could speculate that such antiviral agents could be easily selected from chemical libraries of low
30 molecular weight compounds (Sudol, 1997, Emerging therapeutic targets, Vol. 1, pp. 81- 84). Also, if indeed the PPxY-WW domain interaction represents a common step in the assembly pathways of rhabdovimses, retrovimses, and filovimses, it is tempting to speculate that antivirals which target this interaction may be effective against a variety of viral pathogens including Ebola and Marburg vimses.
35 Table III
VIRUS PROTEIN SEQ.1 POSITION2 SEQ ID ACCES
NO: ION #7
VSV (Ind.) KLGIA PPPY EEDTS 24-27 E X04452
VSV (N.J.) KKMGL PPPY DESCP 24-27 34 M14553
Rabies3 DLWLP PPEY VPLKE 35-38 35 M31046
PIRY MEWES PPSY NEIKS 33-36 36 D26175
S. V. of C.4 KSKGT PPTY EETLA 17-20 37 K02123
Ebola5 ILPTA PPEY MEAIY 10-13
Figure imgf000078_0001
L11365
Marburg6 MQYLN PPPY ADHGA 16-19 39 Z29337
The sequence is derived from the matrix protein of VSV, rabies, Piry, and S.V. of C. viruses. The sequence is derived from the VP40 protein of Ebola and Marburg viruses.
The numbers represent amino acid positions of the PY motif within the protein beginning from the N-terminus.
This sequence (14 amino acids) of the rabies virus matrix protein is perfectly conserved in strains SAD B19, CVS, Nishigahara, ERA, and PV.
Spring Viremia of Carp virus.
Ebola virus (Zaire strain).
Marburg virus (Popp strain).
GenBank Accession number.
10. EXAMPLE: INHIBITION OF GROWTH OF INFLUENZA A/WSN/VIRUS BY
THE NP-SPECIFIC NLS OLIGOPEPTIDE
The yeast 2-hybrid assay has been used previously to identify the specific domains on the NP that bind to the NPI protein (Wang, et al., 1997, J. Virology 71(3): 1850-1856). Mutational analysis including alanine scanning identified the motifs Ser Xaa Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Xaa Xaa Met (SEQ ID NO:40) and Thr Lys Arg Ser Xaa Xaa Xaa Met (SEQ ID NO:41), which are required for binding of NP to NPI-1 and NPI-3, respectively. These sequences were shown to possess nuclear localization signal (NLS) activity. In the present example, MDBK cells were infected at an m.o.i. = 1 in the presence or absence of a 19- amino acid NP-NLS oligopeptide (Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg Gin (SEQ ID NO:22); corresponding to amino acids 2-20 of NP) and an 1 1 -amino acid control peptide (Cys Gly Asp Leu Arg Leu Thr Leu Leu Glu Leu (SEQ ID NO:42)). Hemagglutination titer was measured at 24 hours p.i. At a concentration of 100 μm, the NP-NLS oligopeptide inhibits viral growth a thousand-fold.
The ability of different fragments of the NPI-1 protein to bind the NP-NLS peptide were analyzed. The region of NPI-1 primarily responsible for the binding of NPI-1 to the NP-NLS lies between aa 425-538 at the carboxy terminus of NPI-1, in the region of the STAT-1 binding domain.
These results demonstrate that peptides that correspond to the NP-NLS target site of the NPI-1 binding domain of NP can inhibit the interaction of NP with NPI proteins and can therefore be used to treat influenza infection.
The present invention is not to be limited in scope by the specific embodiments described which are intended as single illustrations of individual aspects of the invention, and functionally equivalent methods and components are within the scope of the invention. Indeed, various modifications of the invention, in addition to those shown and described herein will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the foregoing description and accompanying drawings. Such modifications are intended to fall within the scope of the appended claims.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A method for identifying a substance that inhibits the interaction of a viral protein with a host cell protein comprising: (a) contacting a host cell protein or a peptide comprising a WW domain with a viral protein or peptide containing an amino acid sequence corresponding to the site that binds to the WW domain, under conditions and for a time sufficient to permit binding and formation of a complex, in the presence of a test substance, and
(b) detecting the formation of a complex, in which the ability of a test substance to inhibit the interaction between the host cell protein and the viral protein is indicated by a decrease in complex formation as compared to the amount of complex formed in the absence of the test substance.
2. The method of Claim 1, wherein the WW domain is the YAP WW domain
3. The method of Claim 1, wherein the WW domain is the Nedd4 WW domain.
4. The method of Claim 1 , wherein the viral protein is a Rhabdoviral protein.
5. The method of Claim 1 , wherein the viral protein is an M protein.
6. A method for identifying a substance that inhibits the specific interaction of the NSl-BP protein with the influenza vims NSl protein, comprising:
(a) contacting the NSl-BP protein or a peptide containing an amino acid sequence corresponding to the binding site of the NS 1 -BP protein with the NS 1 protein or peptide having an amino acid sequence corresponding to the binding site of the NSl protein, under conditions and for a time sufficient to permit binding and the formation of a complex, in the presence of a test substance, and
(b) detecting the formation of a complex, in which the ability of the test substance to inhibit the interaction between the NSl-BP protein and the NSl protein is indicated by a decrease in complex formation as compared to the amount of complex formed in the absence of the test substance.
7. A method for identifying a substance that inhibits the specific interaction of the NPI-1 protein with the influenza virus NP protein, comprising: (a) contacting the NPI-1 protein or a polypeptide containing an amino acid sequence corresponding to the binding site of the NPI-1 protein with a polypeptide comprising the NP-NLS domain of the NP protein, under conditions and for a time sufficient to permit binding and the formation of a complex, in the presence of a test substance, and
(b) detecting the formation of a complex, in which the ability of the test substance to inhibit the interaction between the NPI-1 protein and the NP-NLS domain is indicated by a decrease in complex formation as compared to the amount of complex formed in the absence of the test substance.
8. A method for treating or inhibiting viral infection comprising administering to an animal in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising an antiviral compound that inhibits the interaction between a host protein and a viral protein.
9. The method of Claim 8, wherein the antiviral compound is a peptide.
10. The method of Claim 8, wherein the antiviral compound is an antibody.
11. The method of Claim 8, wherein the viral infection is an influenza viral infection.
12. The method of Claim 8, wherein the viral infection is a rhabdovims infection.
13. The method of Claim 1 1 , wherein the host cell protein is NS 1 -BP and the viral protein is NS 1.
14. The method of Claim 11 , wherein the host cell protein is NPI- 1 and the viral protein is NSl .
15. The method of Claim 8, wherein the animal is a human.
16. The method of Claim 8, wherein the composition further comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
17. The method of Claim 8, wherein the composition is administered intranasally, orally or intramuscularly.
18. A method for treating or inhibiting influenza vims infection, comprising administering to an animal in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a composition comprising a polypeptide, said polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence corresponding to the NP-NLS domain of the influenza vims NP protein, said domain inhibiting the specific interaction of the NPI-1 protein with the influenza vi s NP protein.
19. The method of Claim 18, wherein the NP-NLS domain comprises an amino acid sequence of at least eight amino acids within the formula Ala Xaa2 Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Xaa8 Tyr Xaa10 Gin Met Glu Thr Xaa]5 Gly Xaaπ Arg Xaa19; wherein Xaa2 is Ser or Thr, Xaa3 is Gin or Lys, Xaag is Ser or Pro Xaa10 is Glu or Gly, Xaa15 is Asp or Gly, Xaa]7 is Glu or Asp, and Xaa19 is Gin or is absent.
20. The method of Claim 19, wherein the amino acid sequence is Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg.
21. A composition for treating or inhibiting influenza viral infection comprising a polypeptide, said polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence corresponding to the NP-NLS domain of the influenza vims NP protein, said domain inhibiting the specific interaction of the NPI-1 protein with the influenza vims NP protein, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier
22. The composition of Claim 21, wherein the NP-NLS domain comprises an amino acid sequence of at least eight amino acids within the formula Ala Xaa2 Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Xaag Tyr Xaa10 Gin Met Glu Thr Xaa15 Gly Xaa17 Arg Xaa19; wherein Xaa2 is Ser or Thr, Xaa3 is Gin or Lys, Xaag is Ser or Pro Xaa10 is Glu or Gly, XaaI5 is Asp or Gly, XaaI7 is Glu or Asp, and Xaa19 is Gin or is absent.
23. The composition of Claim 22, wherein the amino acid sequence is Ala Ser Gin Gly Thr Lys Arg Ser Tyr Glu Gin Met Glu Thr Asp Gly Glu Arg.
PCT/US2000/022257 1999-08-11 2000-08-11 Antiviral compounds that inhibit viral replication WO2001011335A2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU67713/00A AU6771300A (en) 1999-08-11 2000-08-11 Identication and use of antiviral compounds that inhibit interaction of host cell proteins and viral proteins required for viral replication

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14826399P 1999-08-11 1999-08-11
US60/148,263 1999-08-11

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2001011335A2 true WO2001011335A2 (en) 2001-02-15
WO2001011335A9 WO2001011335A9 (en) 2002-07-11
WO2001011335A3 WO2001011335A3 (en) 2005-03-10

Family

ID=22525014

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2000/022257 WO2001011335A2 (en) 1999-08-11 2000-08-11 Antiviral compounds that inhibit viral replication

Country Status (2)

Country Link
AU (1) AU6771300A (en)
WO (1) WO2001011335A2 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101471245B1 (en) 2012-05-31 2014-12-10 충북대학교 산학협력단 Composition for prevention and treatment of influenza Ａ viral diseases

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5750394A (en) * 1994-05-20 1998-05-12 The Mount Sinai Medical Center Identification and use of antiviral compounds that inhibit interaction of host cell proteins and viral proteins required for viral replication

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5750394A (en) * 1994-05-20 1998-05-12 The Mount Sinai Medical Center Identification and use of antiviral compounds that inhibit interaction of host cell proteins and viral proteins required for viral replication

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101471245B1 (en) 2012-05-31 2014-12-10 충북대학교 산학협력단 Composition for prevention and treatment of influenza Ａ viral diseases

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU6771300A (en) 2001-03-05
WO2001011335A3 (en) 2005-03-10
WO2001011335A9 (en) 2002-07-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7632801B2 (en) Identification and use of antiviral compounds that inhibit interaction of host cell proteins and viral proteins required for viral replication
US6890710B1 (en) Identification and use of antiviral compounds that inhibit interaction of host cell proteins and viral proteins required for viral replication
Huarte et al. PA subunit from influenza virus polymerase complex interacts with a cellular protein with homology to a family of transcriptional activators
Wolff et al. NS1-Binding protein (NS1-BP): a novel human protein that interacts with the influenza A virus nonstructural NS1 protein is relocalized in the nuclei of infected cells
US7148006B2 (en) Screening methods to identify agents that selectively inhibit hepatitis C virus replication
Shaw et al. Nuclear localization of the Nipah virus W protein allows for inhibition of both virus-and toll-like receptor 3-triggered signaling pathways
Kolesnikova et al. Phosphorylation of Marburg virus matrix protein VP40 triggers assembly of nucleocapsids with the viral envelope at the plasma membrane
KR20170133507A (en) Humanized influenza monoclonal antibodies and methods for their use
US8940960B2 (en) HCV entry factor, Occludin
Yi et al. Genome-wide CRISPR-Cas9 screening identifies the CYTH2 host gene as a potential therapeutic target of influenza viral infection
Schmid et al. Functional characterization of the major and minor phosphorylation sites of the P protein of Borna disease virus
Boonyaratanakornkit et al. Alix serves as an adaptor that allows human parainfluenza virus type 1 to interact with the host cell ESCRT system
WO2007005244A1 (en) Henipavirus receptor and uses thereof
Watanabe et al. Binding of the V proteins to the nucleocapsid proteins of human parainfluenza type 2 virus
WO2001011335A2 (en) Antiviral compounds that inhibit viral replication
AU3953895A (en) Antiviral compounds that inhibit interaction of host cell proteins and viral proteins required for replication
Bonte et al. Positive effect of the hepatitis C virus nonstructural 5A protein on viral multiplication
CA2234047A1 (en) Antiviral compounds that inhibit interaction of host cell proteins and viral proteins required for replication
WO2011093485A1 (en) Method for detection and quantification of hepatitis c virus, and polypeptide for use in the method
Sun Henipavirus assembly and budding
Ylösmäki SH3 domain mediated virus-host cell interactions by the nonstructural protein 1 (NS1) of influenza A virus
Cardenas Medranda Inhibition of retinoic acid-inducible gene i-mediated induction of beta interferon by the ns1 protein of influenza a virus
Cárdenas et al. Inhibition of Retinoic Acid-Inducible Gene
Resa-Infante et al. The Host-Dependent Interaction of a-Importins with Influenza PB2 Polymerase

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: C2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: C2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

COP Corrected version of pamphlet

Free format text: PAGES 1/39-39/39, DRAWINGS, REPLACED BY NEW PAGES 1/44-44/44; DUE TO LATE TRANSMITTAL BY THE RECEIVING OFFICE

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
NENP Non-entry into the national phase in:

Ref country code: JP